Electrical Services Specification for Villa (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE

DIVISION 26
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
MB1908 – VILLA (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE)
DIVISION 26 – SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL SERVICES SEPCIFICATIONS

SECTION 26 02 00
GENERAL TECHINICAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................2
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES ...................................................................................................2
1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS ...........................................................................................2
1.3. SPECIFICATION SCOPE .............................................................................................2
1.4. COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS..........................................................................3
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................4
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................4
2.1. TENDER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS ..................................................................4
2.2. PRECEDENCE BETWEEN DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATION AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
...........................................................................................................................4
2.3. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (SHOP DRAWINGS) ......................................................5
2.4. WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (BY THE CONTRACTOR) ........7
2.5. PLANTROOM LAYOUT DRAWINGS (BY THE CONTRACTOR) ..................................8
2.6. SETTING OUT ..............................................................................................................9
2.7. BUILDERS WORK ........................................................................................................9
2.8. APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS & INFORMATION .......................................................12
2.9. FINALISED POSITION OF POINTS .............................................................................12
2.10. TEST NOTICES ...........................................................................................................13
2.11. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION .....................................................................................13
PART 3 | EXECUTION ......................................................................................................13
3.1. GENERAL..................................................................................................................13
3.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS ......................................................................................14
3.3. LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................14
3.4. SPECIALIST SUPPLIERS/INSTALLERS ..........................................................................14
3.5. MANUFACTURERS ...................................................................................................15
3.6. ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE .................................................................................16
3.7. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ...............................................................................17
3.8. PROVISION FOR HANDLING MAJOR PLANT .........................................................17
3.9. HANGERS, INSERTS SLEEVES, SUPPORTS & FOUNDATION BOLTS .........................17
3.10. WORKMANSHIP & MATERIALS ................................................................................18
3.11. SAMPLES ..................................................................................................................18
3.12. DISSIMILAR METALS .................................................................................................19
3.13. PROTECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT.............................................................20
3.14. PAINTING, PROTECTION, PREPARATION FOR PAINTING & CLEANING ON
COMPLETION ............................................................................................................21
3.15. CONCEALED WORK ...............................................................................................22
3.16. EXISTING SERVICES TO BE MAINTAINED .................................................................22
3.17. ENGRAVING ............................................................................................................23
3.18. LABELS ......................................................................................................................23
3.19. SCREWS ....................................................................................................................25
3.20. SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................25
3.21. RADIO AND TELEVISION SUPPRESSION ON ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & EMC
(ELECTRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ....................................................................26
General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 0

3.22. EARTHING ................................................................................................................26

3.23. INSPECTION & TESTING ...........................................................................................27
3.24. SITE TESTS ..................................................................................................................28
3.25. WORKS TESTS............................................................................................................29
3.26. COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................31
3.27. TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLATION ...................................................34
3.28. TESTING INSTRUMENTS .............................................................................................35
3.29. CABLE TESTING ........................................................................................................36
3.30. PRESSURE TESTING OF LV CABLES ..........................................................................37
3.31. ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS CHECK/TEST REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY
THE CONTRACTOR DURING THE INSTALLATION .....................................................38
3.32. TESTING OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS .......................................................39
3.33. OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION ..............................................40
3.34. INSTRUCTION OF CLIENTS STAFF .............................................................................41
3.35. STARTING UP ............................................................................................................41
3.36. TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE ..................................................................................42
3.37. SCHEDULE OF OUTSTANDING ITEMS AND DEFECTS .............................................42
3.38. RECORD DRAWINGS (FINAL DRAWINGS BY CONTRACTOR) ..............................43
3.39. TOC (TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE) .........................................................................45
3.40. CERTIFICATE OF MAKING GOOD DEFECTS ...........................................................45

SECTION 26 02 00 – GENRRAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTES
PART 1 | GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section of the specification includes the following sub-section

heading: General Electrical Technical Requirements
1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the

best International Standards and Codes of Practice and with the current
issue of IEC 60364; and the requirements of the local supply authority.
B. The entire installation shall be installed and tested in accordance with

the relevant Standards and International Electrical Codes (IECs) and
International Standards and requirements of the local supply authority.
1.3. SPECIFICATION SCOPE
A. This section supplements the main contract documents “General

Requirements” and forms part of every section of the Electrical
Specifications and shall be read in conjunction with all sections of this
specification.
B. This specification covers the design of details, supply, installation and

testing of all necessary equipment required for the complete Electrical
Engineering Services as described in the Contract/Documents and
incorporates standard descriptions for equipment and the installation to
be provided under this MEP Trade Contract. The clauses shall be read in
conjunction with all other Trade Contract Documents.
C. Where, for special reasons, requirements differ from those included in

this General Technical Specification and are specified in the detail
Specification or on the associated drawings, then such special
requirements shall supersede the general requirements of this
Specification Section.
D. The words as indicated, where indicated, unless otherwise indicated,

refer to requirements identified elsewhere in the documents issued in

connection with the Contract, e.g. on a drawing, in the Specification or
in a schedule.
E. The extent of the work shall comprise the whole management,

programming, labor and materials required to form a complete
installation, together with such tests, adjustments and commissioning as
prescribed in subsequent clauses and otherwise as may be required in
order to provide an effective working installation to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
F. The words “complete installation” in the foregoing clause shall mean not
only the major items of plant and equipment covered by this
Specification, but all the incidental sundry components that are
required for the complete execution of the works. Also, for the proper
operation of the installation, together with associated labor charges,
whether these sundry components are mentioned in detail in the Tender
documents issued in connection with the Contract.
1.4. COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS
A. The whole of the work and materials to be supplied shall be in

accordance with the following publications as relevant, current at the
date of Tender, unless otherwise stated: -
B. Local Municipality, Green Book Regulations and Electrical Authority

wiring regulations
C. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and European Norms

(EN).
D. Requirements of the local Civil Defense.
E. Requirements and all Regulations of power supply authority including all

latest amendments and
F. Guidance notes.
G. Requirements of the Relevant Safety & Construction Regulations.

H. Air Traffic Control & Civil Aviation Authority (where applicable)
I. Requirements of the telecom local supply authority for communications

installations
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Where possible, supply equipment only from manufacturers who have a

Quality Assurance scheme in accordance with EN ISO 9001 and/or EN
ISO 9002. When submitting manufacturer’s information for approval, a
copy of the EN certification document shall be included in the
submission.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. TENDER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS
A. The whole of the services at present envisaged are indicated in the

Tender documents and Tender drawings and listed in the schedules
included in the Tender documents.
B. This Specification has been prepared to define the quality of material

and workmanship required. In order to avoid mis-interpretation, any
doubts as to the full intent of this specification or accompanying
drawings shall be resolved prior to the completion of the Tender.
C. Drawings issued as part of the Contract Documents are in general

diagrammatic and have been prepared, together with the
Specification, to enable Tenders to be obtained and to provide a basis
for the preparation of coordinated working drawings.
D. Notwithstanding any dimensions which may be given on the drawings,

check all dimensions on site required for the manufacturers of any
materials or products and the cost of taking such dimensions is deemed
to be included in the Tender.
2.2. PRECEDENCE BETWEEN DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATION AND OTHER

DOCUMENTS
A. This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Tender Drawings.

If any variations between the drawings and the Specification occur, the
latter is to take precedence and detail drawings shall take precedence
over small scale drawings. However, the Contractor shall draw to the
Engineer’s attention any significant discrepancies before assuming an
interpretation.
B. If any variations occur to any regulations, statutory instruments or

International Standards etc., the drawings and Specification shall take
precedence. The Contractor shall however, refer any such
discrepancies to the Engineer before assuming a particular
interpretation, particularly in respect of statutory instruments, regulations
or Norms.
2.3. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (SHOP DRAWINGS)
A. Prior to manufacture and installation, prepare installation drawings for

the whole of the Electrical Services installation in accordance with the
requirements of the program and schedules. These shall be computer
generated using the latest version of AutoCAD software. Refer to the
main Contract documents for the complete procedures for the
submission of installation Drawings. This generally takes precedence of
the requirements as listed below.
B. Within thirty working days from the placing of a Contract, the Contractor
shall produce a programme indicating his production sequence for
installation drawings. The programme shall be arranged so that the
installation drawings shall be submitted sequentially for approval in due
time to meet the Contract construction program and schedules.
C. Paper prints of each installation drawing shall be issued to the Engineer

for review purposes. These prints shall be clearly marked For Examination.
For the exact number of prints required refer to the General Conditions
of Contract.
D. When drawings have been returned with no comment the Contractor

shall issue one CD and two paper prints of each drawing to the Engineer
for stamping Issued for Construction.

E. Installation drawings shall be reviewed by the Engineer and returned to

the Contractor marked “Reviewed”, “Reviewed as Noted” or “Returned
for Correction”. Installation drawings noted “Returned for Correction”
shall be corrected and re-submitted.
F. No equipment shall be delivered to the job site unless the manufacturer

has received a “Reviewed “or “Reviewed as Noted” copy of the
pertinent Installation drawings.
G. If the drawing is returned with comments, the Contractor shall amend

the drawing to take account of the comments and resubmit for
examination and issuing. The procedure for re-submittal shall be treated
as an initial submittal. Each time a drawing is re-submitted for review it
shall be treated as a revision.
H. In preparing his programme for the execution of the Contract works, the
Contractor shall allow twenty working days for the Engineer’s first review
of the installation drawings, and ten working days for second or
subsequent review.
I. Responsibility for errors in the installation drawings irrespective of whether

the drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer shall remain with the
Contractor and no additional costs whatsoever shall be payable, as a
result of any error.
J. The Contract drawings shall not be considered as the installation

drawings. Additional copies of the Contract drawings can be provided
in CD disk format, if required, at current CAD drafting and materials rates
if these are considered by the Contractor to represent a suitable base
from which the installation drawings can be prepared.
K. Installation drawings shall be to an approved scale and shall also form

the basis of the as installed record drawings as detailed elsewhere in this
specification. General layout drawings shall be to 1:50 scale with
detailed drawings by the Contractor at a large scale as necessary.
L. The Contractor shall consult the current Architectural, Structural, Interior

Design, Landscaping, Fire Engineering, Mechanical, Public Health and
all other working drawings during the preparation of the installation

drawings and ensure that the installations are physically coordinated.
The Contractor shall adjust his installation drawings to allow for site
tolerances and discrepancies and changes in building layout where the
principles and intent of the design of the services are not affected.
M. Where the principles and intent of design are affected notice of the
conflict shall be given to the Engineer.
N. The Tender drawings show the location in principle for the various
services. The detailed position shall be determined and coordinated by
the Contractor and shown on the installation drawings.
O. The Engineer shall have the right at all reasonable times to inspect the
premises of the Contractor all drawings for any portion of the Works.
P. The Contractor’s drawings shall be titled in an approved manner with

the official title block fully indicating the part of the works to which they
apply. Drawings shall be numbered in sequence and an approved
numbering system shall be agreed.
Q. Once reviewed, drawings shall not be departed from except with the
written approval of the Engineer.
R. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any discrepancies,

errors or omissions in the drawings and other supplied by him, whether or
not such drawings and particulars have been examined by the
Engineer.
S. Information contained in any of the drawings supplied by the Engineer

shall not be utilized for any purpose other than for the Contract Works
and any such information shall not be communicated to other parties
for other purposes without the specific approval of the Engineer.
2.4. WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (BY THE CONTRACTOR)
A. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be prepared for all plant requiring

Electrical connections. Where manufacturers’ original drawings are
used, they shall be specific to the relevant plant and all references to

optional features, other machines of a range, etc., shall be deleted. All

wiring diagrams shall clearly indicate that wiring which forms part of or
is connected to the equipment as delivered and shall include the
following minimum information to enable the site connections and
wiring to be completed by the appropriate Contractor:
1. Maximum electrical loading for each power cable.
2. Cable termination facilities.
3. Cable identification and all terminal numbers.
4. Protective device ratings for cable protection
B. Where necessary redraw manufacturer standard diagrams to comply

with these requirements, in addition all items of plant and equipment
requiring electrical connections shall have adequate wiring diagrams
fixed inside panels, etc., to ensure correct wiring to the appropriate local
standard.
2.5. PLANTROOM LAYOUT DRAWINGS (BY THE CONTRACTOR)
A. Detail layout drawings of all dimensioned plant and equipment

including wiring arrangements.
B. Detail plantroom drawings including sections and elevations.
C. Drawings showing all the general distribution of the service from the
plant item up to and including
D. the final termination points.
E. Any detail drawings, or manufacturers drawings, required prior to, or

found necessary during erection, manufacture or progress of the works.
F. Detail drawings of all fabricated steelwork, brackets, supports, gantries,

ladders, platforms and all other items of a similar nature.
G. Detailed plans, sections and elevations showing all required builders

work, including the size and position of all bases and plinths for
equipment, holding down bolts, holes, chases, trenches etc., in the
structure or building fabric related where applicable to the

column/building grid lines, to be built in or attached to the structure.
H. Drawings showing all conduit routes, sizes and installation shall be

provided.
2.6. SETTING OUT
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out
of the Contract Works from site datum points on each floor level. The
setting out shall be carried out by experienced operatives with the
appropriate equipment to ensure that the Contract Works are fixed
correctly in relation to the Building and any special features or fittings
attached to it. All precautions shall be taken to ensure that a good
service coordinated appearance is achieved within the Building.
B. The marking out of Builders Work required by the Contractor including

the supervisory attendance and direction of all tradesmen detailed to
execute Builders Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall co-ordinate and be responsible for coordinating

and setting out the ceilings and shall ensure luminaires and other ceiling
mounted equipment (e.g. smoke/heat sensors, speakers, WAPs etc.).
are correctly located. This includes identifying items provided by other
trades such as ventilation grilles, sprinkler heads etc.
D. The Contractor shall co-ordinate all lighting switches, socket outlets,

data outlets etc. with the Interior Designer’s drawings. All mounting
heights and spacings indicated on Interior Design drawings will be
duplicated onto contractor setting-out drawings for final installation.
2.7. BUILDERS WORK
A. The expression Builders Work shall mean that work which shall be carried
out in connection with, or consequent on the Electrical Services defined
in this Specification, and shall embrace the following: -
1. The cutting and forming of holes for services through walls, floors,
ceilings, partitions, roofs, etc. and making good.
2. The cutting or forming of chases, recesses, etc. in floors and walls, etc.,
for services and making good.
3. The building-in where specified or indicated, of brackets and holder

fasteners, inserts, rag bolts or other form of services suspension, or plant
fixing.
4. Provision of sleeves and ducts for electrical services as necessary.
5. The formation of concrete bases, plinths etc. for plant and equipment.
6. The building of concrete and/or brick ducts, and trenches for buried
mains.
7. The building of manholes, pits, etc.
8. The excavating of trenches for underground services etc. and the filling
in after the services are laid.
B. Builders Work drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor which co-

ordinate and show all Services Builders Work requirements. The drawings
shall show in plan and elevation with sections where necessary all holes,
chases, inserts, equipment bases etc., necessary for the complete
Mechanical, Public Health, Electrical and ELV (Communications)
Installations. The drawing shall also include the overall weight of all items
of equipment and where necessary weight distribution of equipment.
C. Openings in structural concrete and brick walls have been notionally

identified during the design. The Contractor shall allow for checking that
services can be installed in these openings and confirming requirements
to the Engineer prior to construction.
D. In general, all holes through walls, floors etc. for services shall be formed
during construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that
Builders Work details are correctly mentioned, collated and
coordinated to enable this work to be carried out at the proper stage
of construction.
E. In addition, the marking out of, providing templates for, and supervising
of all Builders Work required shall be carried by the Contractor.

F. Drilling and/or plugging of walls, floors, ceilings for heavyweight and

lightweight fixings shall be excluded from the meaning of Builders Work
as far as is considered normal for the trade, and shall therefore be
included as part of this Contract. The Contractor shall also include for
the provision of all raw bolts and similar fixings. The type of fixing shall be
approved by the Engineer before work commences.
G. On no account are holes to be cut in any steelwork, reinforced

concrete, or pre -cast concrete, without the express permission in writing
from the Engineer. Holes shall not be cut in pre-cast pre-stressed
concrete units under any circumstances.
H. Any holes in steelwork (that are approved) shall be drilled; burning holes
by means of welding equipment shall not be permitted unless by the
Engineer’s special written approval.
I. Provide, locate and install conduit sleeves for cable runs and sleeves for
bus bar trunking (bus duct), sheet steel trunking and/or cable tray
passing through concrete walls, beams, slabs and floors, in their correct
locations. Sleeves for cable runs shall be galvanized steel conduit.
Sleeves for wireways and/or cable tray shall be made of 3mm
galvanized steel.
J. Provide concrete curbs, minimum 100mm high above finished floor

surrounding openings where bus ducts, wireways and cable trays rise
through slabs above grade to prevent debris and water from falling to
floor below. Concrete curb shall have sufficient area to adequately
carry bus duct support brackets.
K. Provide concrete curbs, minimum 100mm high above finished floor for
telephone cable risers and other openings intended for electrical use in
slabs above grade.
L. Extend galvanized sleeves for conduit rising through slabs 100mm

minimum above finished floors.
M. Provide sleeves, passing through floors having a waterproof membrane,

with an integral flashing clamp.
2.8. APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS & INFORMATION
A. All drawings, schedules or other information provided by vendors and

manufacturers shall be approved by the Contractor and such approval
shall ensure that all requirements of the Contract documentation have
been incorporated.
B. The Contractor shall forward two paper prints of the approved drawings,
or two copies of the approved schedules or other information to the
Engineer for record purposes.
C. No order to a vendor or manufacturer to commence

manufacture/installation shall be given until written acknowledgement
of receipt by the Engineer of the above information, has been received
by the Contractor.
D. Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be
borne by the Contractor at no cost to the Contract.
2.9. FINALISED POSITION OF POINTS
A. It shall be noted that the positions of all points and equipment shown on
the Tender drawings are approximate only and are for the guidance in
the preparation of the Tender.
B. The Contract shall include for the determination on site of the finalized
position of all points and equipment in collaboration with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall allow for the movement of all points and equipment
up to a radius of 2.0m from the positions shown on the contract
drawings.
C. The Contractor shall also refer to the Architectural and Interior Design
drawings for the position and location of all points, etc. before any work
is commenced. The Architectural drawings shall generally take
precedence. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer for resolution.
D. The locations of switches, thermostats, outlets and control devices are

shown diagrammatically only.
E. Mount switches, thermostats and other controls as close to door jambs

and other openings as possible, maintaining a minimum of 100mm from

trims of doors except where installed in door frames of metal partitions.
Ensure that these locations meet with the approval of the Engineer.
Check all doors swings and install switches on correct side of doors as
defined under Wiring Devices.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all alterations made

necessary due to non -compliance with the requirements of this clause.
2.10. TEST NOTICES
A. Allow for all formalities in connection with Test Notices, Agreement and
Application for Supply Forms etc. and that all such documents requiring
the Client’s signature are forwarded to the Engineer in ample time to
meet the contract program.
B. Additional payments shall not be made as are incurred due to

reconnections, revisits etc., by Supply Authorities or any other officials.
2.11. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contract shall include the inspection of the Architectural, Interior

Design and Structural drawings by the Contractor as necessary to obtain
more precise details regarding the construction and finishes of the
buildings.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for all labor, materials, tools, plant
and equipment required to supply, deliver and erect all equipment,
described in this Specification and indicated on the drawings to form a
complete working facility including testing and commissioning of same.
This shall mean not only the main items of plant and equipment but also
all incidental sundry components with their labor charges necessary for
the complete execution of the works.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that his work is installed in the correct
sequence.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all sections of the
work and all materials are compatible with one another. The Contractor
shall check and ensure that all of the equipment and works offered by
him shall fit into the space provided in the building(s) including the
limited entry through doorways and into ducts.
3.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. All equipment shall be required to operate successfully in the climatic

conditions prevailing in the locality. Equipment, even if normally
operating in air-conditioned spaces, may be required to operate at
times when the air conditioning system is not being used. Under such
conditions all equipment shall operate satisfactorily and still have a
working life comparable with that expected from equipment operating
in an air-conditioned environment.
3.3. LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. It is expected that the internal temperature in non-air-conditioned

rooms may reach in excess of 40 deg. C and it is required that all
equipment shall be capable of operating at this temperature without
component failure or reduction in performance.
B. At the time that manufacturers drawings are submitted for approval or

immediately prior to dispatch from the manufacturers’ works, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a letter from the manufacturer
confirming that the equipment being supplied shall be suitable for the
conditions.
3.4. SPECIALIST SUPPLIERS/INSTALLERS
A. In the event of any specialist suppliers/installers being employed for the

design, installation, testing and commissioning of specialized items,
elements or systems, all allowances shall be made for informing
Specialist suppliers/installers (e.g. for BMS or AV, IT, Security) of all details
of the Building structures, programming arrangements and other
relevant details at the time of Tender and during the course of the
Contract.
B. The specialist suppliers/installers shall provide adequate supervision at all

times work is being carried out.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that specialist suppliers/installers are aware

of the requirements for, and provide in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the specified installation and operating and maintenance
documentation.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that all works carried out by specialist
suppliers/installers are physically coordinated one with the other and
with the Contract Works, and that all Builders Work requirements are
allowed and coordinated in accordance with the Builders Work
clause(s).
E. The Contractor shall include with his Tender a schedule of those

specialist suppliers/installers included by him and the scope of works to
be carried out by each specialist.
3.5. MANUFACTURERS
A. In order to achieve uniformity in the equipment supplied and to simplify

the acquisition and storage of spare parts, the Contractor shall, as far as
possible, purchase similar equipment from the same manufacturer.
B. The Contractor may, at the Engineer’s discretion, install the same

equipment from more than one manufacturer if due to the volume of
equipment to be supplied a single manufacturer cannot provide the
total requirement in the time allotted in the construction programme. In
this case the Contractor shall first obtain the Engineer’s written approval
of his proposals before placing orders.
C. The Manufacturers included in this document have been prepared to

indicate the manufacturers which have been of primary consideration
in the preparation of the design and to provide a guide to the
Contractor in relation to the standard of equipment to be incorporated
in his Tender.
D. Descriptions of the manufactured items of plant and equipment and/or

standards are also included in the attached Specifications to further

indicate the quality and type of equipment required.
E. Subject to the conditions imposed under the main contract conditions,

the Contractor may include in the Tender for alternative equipment and
standards to those described in the Schedules, provided such
equipment and standards can be illustrated as being of an equivalent
standard or manufacturer to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Provide outline details of all alternatives offered as part of the bid at the
time of Tendering and in addition, provide full supporting information,
including manufacturer’s technical details and illustrations etc., to the
Engineer for his approval within 14 days of being so requested.
G. The Contractor shall also ensure that all equipment is either available
locally or that the manufacturer is locally represented to ensure the
equipment is easily available and future servicing and spares can be
obtained to permit continuity of maintenance.
H. All equipment whether base or substitute shall fit into the space
allocated. The cost of all additional work or adjustments resulting from
the acceptance of alternative equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor.
I. In the event that the Engineer considers any alternative, for whatever
reason, to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall include for the
equipment identified in the Schedules.
3.6. ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall ensure that all plant and equipment is easily
accessible by maintenance staff and adequate space allowed for
maintenance and replacement of plant and components. Full standing
headroom is required over the maximum possible area with easy safe
access free from obstruction given to all equipment and instruments
required for normal operation. All escape routes shall have a clear floor
space with full standing headroom.

3.7. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Wherever any item of electrical equipment requiring accessibility,

maintenance or adjustments is concealed, ensure adequate access, or
provide an access door or panel and arrange for its installation by the
main Contractor.
A. Doors shall be sized to allow proper and easy access, and located to
suit the concealed device. In removable acoustic panel ceilings, no
access doors are required. Use authority labelled fire-rated access doors
in all fire rated walls and ceilings which act as fire barriers and match
the door type with the ceiling type and applied finish.
B. Submit for the Engineer’s review, floor plans and shop drawings showing
the size, type and exact location of all access doors and panels.
C. All access doors and panels shall be shown on the record drawings.
Notations, adjacent to each access door shown on the drawings, shall
indicate frequency of maintenance required for item or items above or
behind the doors.
3.8. PROVISION FOR HANDLING MAJOR PLANT
D. Suitable provisions by means of eyebolts or other methods approved by

the Engineer shall be made to facilitate handling all plant covered by
this Specification. Each screwed eyebolt shall be provided with a collar
firmly bedded down on a faced seating.
3.9. HANGERS, INSERTS SLEEVES, SUPPORTS & FOUNDATION BOLTS
A. Provide hangers, inserts, sleeves and supports required to

accommodate the equipment and materials of this Division.
B. Except for plywood backboards, do not use wood to fasten outlet boxes
or electrical equipment, except where wood forms a part of the building
structure at the point of installation.
C. Metal supports, screws, bolts and hardware shall be galvanized.
D. Apply cold galvanizing compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surface

immediately after cutting.
E. Provide separate supports as required for electrical apparatus erected

on or in any wall or partition.
F. All such supporting work shall be approved by the Engineer prior to

installation.
G. The Contractor shall supply to approve dimensions all necessary

foundation bolts, nuts, plates and frames for the whole equipment
covered by this Specification.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for aligning and levelling up each

item of equipment supplied under this Contract using steel shims as
necessary, and for placing the holding down bolts in the correct
position.
3.10. WORKMANSHIP & MATERIALS
A. Materials and workmanship generally shall be of the highest standard

and the Specification shall be closely adhered to.
B. Where materials or equipment are not described in detail, they shall be

of the best quality available and shall comply with the appropriate
regulations. The Contractor shall, if required, submit drawings or samples
of such materials or equipment to the Engineer for his approval before
use on the Contract works.
3.11. SAMPLES
A. The Contractor shall include for providing samples of the items of

equipment and finishes as required for the Engineer approval. These
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Luminaires
2. Accessory cover plates including white plastic, metal clad and special
finish type
3. Name plates
4. Access doors and panels

5. Labels
6. Distribution boards (complete with breakers)
7. Containment systems
8. Cable types
B. The samples shall be submitted to the Engineer as soon as possible so

that the subsequent delivery of the associated equipment shall not be
delayed. No orders shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the
samples.
C. All samples shall be correctly labelled and forwarded to the Engineer.

At least 14 working days shall be allowed for approval of samples.
D. Unless otherwise stated, approved samples shall be retained on site by

the Engineer, who shall reject all such materials which do not
correspond with the approved samples. Rejected material s shall be
removed from the site immediately.
E. Where the Engineer has carried out an inspection of materials before

they leave the manufacturer’s premises prior to being delivered to the
site, the Engineer shall be at liberty to reject any such material after
delivery should he consider them to be in any way unsatisfactory
notwithstanding the preliminary inspection and tests at the
manufacturer’s premises.
F. The Contractor shall include for the cost of remedial work or tests and
inspections necessary due to unsatisfactory material and/or equipment.
3.12. DISSIMILAR METALS
A. The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that no chemical

or electrolytic action takes place where dissimilar metals and/or
materials are used together. This is of particular importance where
aluminium and aluminium alloys are used.
B. The Contractor shall keep the points of contact of dissimilar metals to a

minimum and apply oxidation inhibiting grease around the contact

area.
3.13. PROTECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
A. In addition to requirements indicated elsewhere in the Contract

Documents, insofar as protection is concerned (i.e. protection of the
whole of the installation during storage and during execution of the
works) the protection of all items of plant, specialist equipment and
machinery primer from damage on site and from adverse
environmental conditions up to the time the building is handed over
shall be included as part of this Contract, such protection being to the
following minimum standards: -
1. In the case of factory finished cubicle type equipment, all top and side
edges shall be protected with timber battens forming angle sections
with industrial felt packing between the timber and the plant. These
protective angles shall be cross braced with further timber battens to
form an open crate with additional protection over any particular fragile
section i.e. instruments, mimic panels etc. The top surface of any such
crate exceeding 0.30sq.m. shall be completely boarded in. In addition,
a strong transparent plastic sheet or bag of not less than 500-gauge
thickness shall be arranged over or under the protective timber to
provide a dust and damp-proof membrane.
2. In the case of electrical control panels and like equipment, allow for the
provision and maintenance of temporary internal electrical heaters and
for the cost of electricity and wiring thereto, in circumstances where the
Engineer considers that such equipment would otherwise deteriorate
due to damp conditions prior to handing over.
3. Electric motors, starters, switchboards and the like shall be enclosed in a

plastic sheet or bag, as described above. All stainless-steel equipment
shall be covered with a P.V.C. wrapper until handover. All ferrous parts
shall be coated with grease.
4. When necessary to remove, or partly remove, the protection for

installation, or making connections to the plant, allow for replacing

protection to the standard specified under this heading, immediately

the said operation is completed.
5. Allow for providing dust sheets as and where required. All parts of the
plant which are liable to rust shall be covered with tallow for protection
during the progress of the work. Upon completion this tallow shall be
cleaned off and the parts polished. Accessory plates shall be protected
up to the time of handover by a suitable P.V.C. envelope.
3.14. PAINTING, PROTECTION, PREPARATION FOR PAINTING & CLEANING ON

COMPLETION
A. All ungalvanized ferrous materials not plated shall be supplied free from
rust and scale, and be dipped or otherwise coated with a protective
priming paint of a type suitable for receiving the finishing protective or
decorative paint.
B. All ungalvanized steel parts fabricated by the Contractor, e.g. brackets

and supports, suspension supports, flanges, screwed joints, steelwork,
etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned removing all rust, grease, oil, dirt and
surface corrosion using wire brush, emery paper and degreasing media
as required after fabrication. It shall then be painted one coat of either
zinc phosphate, zinc chromate or calcium plumate with a further coat
after erection.
C. Where the protective paint coating has been damaged or the surfaces
show signs of rust the affected areas shall be cleaned as above prior to
repainting, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. galvanized surfaces shall be inspected and the galvanizing protection

repaired where damaged using a suitable zinc paint process.
E. All exposed metalwork within plantrooms, tank rooms, service subways

and other similar plant areas shall be painted after preparation as
detailed above with undercoats and finishing coat of a colour to be
agreed with the Engineer. In all cases the actual grade of paint to be
used shall be suitable for the surface operating temperature and
approved by the manufacturer as being correct for the application
concerned.
F. The paint manufacturer to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.
G. All painting shall be carried out by skilled tradesmen.
H. At the completion of the Contract all parts of the installation shall be

thoroughly cleaned. All
I. equipment, panels etc. shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt, metal

cuttings, etc., which may have accumulated. Any discolouration or
other damage to parts of the building or its finish or furnishing due to the
failure of the Contractor to properly clean the equipment shall be the
liability of the Contractor with the necessary remedial works instructed
by the Engineer.
J. If, on final inspection before handover, cleaning has not been carried
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, clean the plant again. If, on handover, the plant is found to be
in an unclean state, the Engineer may clean or have cleaned any plant,
the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.15. CONCEALED WORK
A. No work shall be concealed until inspected and tested in the presence

of the Engineer and 7 days’ notice shall be given to the Engineer in
writing.
3.16. EXISTING SERVICES TO BE MAINTAINED
A. Where applicable, existing services (including gas, water, electricity, soil,

waste, and rainwater) to any existing premises are to be fully maintained
during the progress of the works and additional work and materials to
maintain flow at all times is to be included in this Contract and if
necessary to provide any temporary diversions and supports for the
same before any operations are commenced.
B. All existing services disturbed by the Works are to be fully reinstated in

accordance with the quality defined in the specification. Allow for
making all connections to existing services out of normal working hours
where required.
3.17. ENGRAVING
A. The Contract shall include for engraving to switch plates, or other special
plates in connection with special lighting, night lighting, clock system
and fire alarm installations etc., as detailed on the attached drawing
and/or Specification Section.
B. The form of the lettering shall be determined at a later date. For the
purpose of Tendering, red filled engraved lettering 9mm high shall be
included.
C. For Tender purposes, all engraving shall be in a minimum of two

languages, including English. The
D. “local language” where referred is Arabic.
3.18. LABELS
A. All labels to be in a minimum of two languages, including English. To

avoid confusion in translation into local language, the words START and
STOP and not OPEN and CLOSED shall be used.
B. All equipment, i.e. switches, distribution boards, starters, panels, etc., to

include all ELV and communication systems etc. supplied under this
Contract shall be fitted with external labels made from rectangular
pieces of approved ivorine, perspex or laminate. The characters shall be
reverse engraved, coloured white against a black background
complete with bevelled edges and fixed by means of a 3M chrome
screws, nuts and washers.
C. Letters shall be not less than 6 mm high with larger letters for main
equipment such as switchboards, etc.
D. Each label shall detail: -
1. Services or equipment controlled.
2. Voltage, phasing and frequency when different from normal mains

supply.

3. Identification markings as detailed in the specification e.g. Main

Incomer 95mm2 Cu 400V TPN Main
4. Essential Isolator 160A A3 etc.
E. Permanent weather resisting notice plates with red lettering on a white

background shall be mounted adjacent to fire service main switches,
fire service auxiliary switches, fire service push buttons and associated
red indicating lamps. In cases where complete isolation is not achieved
by the fire service main switch or the fire service push button, the notice
plate shall indicate the location of any auxiliary switches in the building.
The details to be included on the notice plates shall be either as
indicated on the attached drawings and/or specification section or as
detailed by the Engineer.
F. All fire service main switches, fire service auxiliary switches, fire service
pushes and button shall be painted fire red (Colour No. 04E53) to ensure
easy identification.
G. At the completion of the works the various sections of the electrical

installation shall be colour coded or labelled as prescribed in the
relevant Code of Practice or Specification, or as determined by the
Engineer.
H. The Contract shall include for the provision of one metal copy of an
approved type electrical accident instruction sheet in each of the HV
and LV switch rooms, all electrical cupboards, plantrooms and
generator rooms to comply with the local Municipality requirements.
I. Framed schematic diagrams shall be provided in HV, LV and generator

rooms as part of the Contract.
J. All main, sub-main and multicore XLPE, PILC and PVC armoured cables
shall be marked with non-corrosive labels bearing the cable reference
given by the Engineer or his representative. The labels shall be provided
at each cable joint, at each end of the ducts, at each termination and
at intervals of 10.0m on straight runs, and at 2.0m at deviations in the
route. Label material and inscriptions (in Arabic and English) shall be
approved, a sample being submitted to the Engineer prior to

manufacture and installation.
3.19. SCREWS
A. The screws used for fixing accessory cover plates shall be of the dome
slotted raised head countersunk type, finished to match the respective
plates where metallic plates are used.
3.20. SPARE PARTS
The Tender prices shall include for supplying the following items, unless
otherwise stated: -
A. A complete set of spare main circuit breakers or fuses for each

connected unit on LV and HV switchboard as applicable.
B. 5% spare Disconnecting Switches (Isolators) and Switch Fuses of each

size included in the Contract.
C. 5% spare fuses of the appropriate size for each of the fused plug tops,
described in the foregoing specification.
D. Spare circuit breakers and fuses shall be handed over to the Engineer
and two copies of a signed receipt obtained for them. One copy of the
receipt shall be forwarded to the Engineer for reference.
E. 2% of the total quantity of each type of lighting fixture. This quantity shall
not be less than one fixture
F. Additional diffusers for 5% of the total quantity of each type of lighting

fixtures provided with acrylic, plastic or glass enclosures. Diffusers shall be
identical to those of the installed fixtures. This quantity shall not be less
than two diffusers of each type. of each type.
G. 10% Spare lamps at each type of size included in the Contract.
H. 5% of the total quantity of control gear (ballast) of each type and size
but in no case less than (6) ballast of each size and type.
I. Wall switches – provide five percent (5%) of the number of each size and
type of wall switch installed.

J. 10% spare contactors and relays of each type and size.
K. 5% spare devices at each type used for the Fire Detection and Alarm
System.
L. 5% spare at each type and size of wiring devices and power outlets.
M. Provide spare parts to all other services in line with manufactures’

recommendations.
N. Detailed Pricelist
O. The contractor shall submit with his offer detail prices of the spare parts
required to be provided under the Contract indicating the unit rate of
each item.
3.21. RADIO AND TELEVISION SUPPRESSION ON ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & EMC

(ELECTRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
A. All electrical equipment such as motors and all thermostats shall be

provided with radio and television suppressors, complying with the
requirements of the local authority regulations.
B. The Contractor shall take full cognizance of the EEC requirements for
EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility and
sequence and include for this in the Tender.
3.22. EARTHING
A. This Contract shall include for the installation of all earthing and bonding
together of all exposed conductive parts, equipotential and
supplementary bonding in accordance with IEC 60364, Electricity Supply
Regulation, and the local Electricity and Water Authority requirements.
B. All joints in networks shall be kept to an absolute minimum and have

negligible impedance.
C. Clamps, lugs or tags are to be provided to enable connection of

bonding conductors to equipment earthing terminals/metallic service
to be bonded.
D. PROTECTIVE CABLE TERMINATIONS: For bolted connections use crimp

type lugs compressed by automatic tool to achieve correct pressure

and crimp depth. Make connections between tape and equipment
using high tensile grade brass bolts with brass nuts, washers and locking
devices. Use phosphor bronze bolts, nuts and washers where
connections are liable to corrosion.
E. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR WARNING NOTICES/LABELS: Provide a

permanent label durably marked in letters 4.75mm minimum height
SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE, in visible position,
at each bonding conductor connection to extraneous conductive
parts.
F. Earth conductors shall be sized in accordance with the tables given in

IEC 60364.
3.23. INSPECTION & TESTING
A. All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected, tested,
set to work and commissioned in accordance with the current Local
Authority requirements, European Norms and IEC standards and as
stipulated by equipment suppliers.
B. No inspection or testing by the Engineer nor the witnessing of satisfactory

tests nor the authorizing of dispatch to site shall in any way relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under this Contract, nor shall it in any
way limit the right of the Engineer to reject such items after delivery to
site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or
unsuitable for their intended purpose.
C. When the Contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer

who, in turn, has bought -in major components from a secondary
supplier, the Engineer shall have the right to elect to inspect such
components at the Works of the secondary supplier, and the Contractor
shall ensure, when placing his orders, that such rights are secured. For
the purpose of this clause, inter -departmental orders within the same
organization shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving
separate organizations.

D. The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and
equipment at the makers' works. The exercise by the Engineer of this
right shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to carry
out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
E. No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for dispatch until it has

been inspected by the
F. Engineer, or inspection has been waived and dispatch has been

authorized.
G. When one or more of the Contractor’s purchase orders covers the

supply of a number of like components or items of equipment, the
Engineer shall have the right to require that one item or component of
each type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the
relevant National Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected
only to routine tests.
3.24. SITE TESTS
A. The Contractor shall include in the Contract to carry out all necessary
checks and tests to prove that the completed installations fully comply
with specified requirements. This shall include the cost for all specialist
manufacturers, suppliers and sub-Contractors.
B. Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section

thereof, the installation or that section and all of the associated
electrical equipment shall be subjected to the tests specified in the
relevant National Standards and in IEC 60364, together with such other
tests as may be specified in order to prove compliance with this
specification.
C. All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance
with a programme to be agreed with the Engineer, and facilities shall
be made available for the Engineer to be present at all such checks and
tests if he so desires.

D. Artificial lighting tests of lumen levels shall be scheduled out, indicating

average and minimum lux levels achieved in the working place once
wall and floor finishes have been applied (for reflectance’s).
E. Emergency lighting levels shall also be tested and scheduled out in a

similar manner.
F. The Contractor shall include for the cost of any repair or replacement of
faulty systems or equipment, which does not function correctly or fail
any of the test procedures.
3.25. WORKS TESTS
A. The Contractor shall inspect and test at the makers works, during
manufacture and after completion, all or any particular manufactured
material, apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this
specification and shall notify the Engineer in advance of all such
inspections and tests.
B. Upon completion of manufacture, or before dispatch in the case of

stock items, all material, apparatus and equipment intended for
incorporation in the Works shall be subject to the tests specified in the
relevant National Standard or elsewhere in this specification together
with such additional tests as may be required in order to prove
compliance with this specification. When no relevant European Norms
exists, or the appropriate National Standard fails to specify tests, the
Contractor shall submit his proposals for the tests to be employed to
provide compliance with the specification.
C. The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the
provisions of this specification shall be accurately and comprehensively
recorded on a form of test certificate signed by the person - in-charge
of the testing procedure and countersigned by the Contractor and four
copies of every such test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer.
D. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements

the date and time of the test, and ambient conditions, a fully detailed
description of the test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and any
relevant performance curves.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Engineer is

advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment is ready
for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers’ premises. At least seven
days’ notice shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this
period of notice in Clause 14 Programme.
F. In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or

equipment relies upon type tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the
suitability of his product(s), the Contractor shall arrange for triplicate
copies of certificates giving the results of such type tests to be submitted
to the Engineer at the time the order is placed.
G. No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be

dispatched to site until the
H. Engineer has had the opportunity to inspect it or has given written

authorization for dispatch.
I. Tests not carried out in the presence of the Engineer shall not be
regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the Engineer
shall have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing
process in his absence.
J. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements,

the date and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed
description of the test carried out, the results obtained, and any relevant
details such as test equipment calibration date and instrument make,
type and serial number.
K. No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or

otherwise permanently concealed from view until the Engineer has had
the opportunity to inspect it, or given written authorization for covering
to proceed.
L. No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the
Engineer or painting has been authorized, unless the final pain finish is

necessary to provide the necessary climatic protection.
M. No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations shall be recognized as

complete until all of the specified inspections and tests have been
satisfactorily carried out.
N. The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus
equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests therein. The
exercise by the Engineer of this right shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to
submit test certificates.
3.26. COMMISSIONING
A. Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on

completed sections of the Works, the Contractor shall duly commission
each section of the electrical installation and leave it in full working
order. The term Commissioning shall be deemed to include: -
1. The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipment which

have previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and
capable of being energized with complete safety.
2. The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant,

in accordance with the directions of the Engineer or, failing such
directions, in accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
3. The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment.
4. The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by

the carrying out, where required, of further tests and the making of all
necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
B. Compliance with the requirements of this section of the specification

shall not, by itself, in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are
made correctly, and that the installations and equipment are in
completely safe and satisfactory condition.
D. All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the

requirements of this section of the specification shall be carried out, or
continuously supervised, by a competent and experienced
commissioning engineer.
E. If considered necessary, the Commissioning Engineer shall set up a

Commissioning Panel to oversee all activities relating to commissioning
of installations, plant and equipment. The Contractor shall provide
appropriate representatives as members of the Panel to act in an
advisory capacity assisting the Engineer in all matters relating to the
commissioning process.
F. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching
operations and all work on electrical circuits and equipment which have
once been energized are carried out in a thoroughly safe manner and
shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an approved permit -to-work
system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an authorized
person and shall communicate the name of such person in writing to the
Engineer.
G. In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate particular

employee(s) as Switchgear Operator, and shall ensure that all
switchgear operations are carried out by the nominated person(s) and
that such person(s) are always available for this duty when required.
H. The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the

plant to be commissioned, the operations to be carried out, and the
time scale, with exact dates for specific operations, details of
requirements for water and power services and attendance or
provisions by specialist trades. This commissioning schedule, in draft form,
shall be submitted not less than four weeks in advance of the date on
which commissioning is to commence.
I. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall present the information

from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flow diagram or

Critical Path chart.
J. The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the

electrical equipment and installations shall be as directed by the
Engineer or, in the absence of such directions, shall be proposed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
K. No connection or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment

which has already been commissioned and set to work, except with the
prior consent of the Engineer.
L. No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without

the prior agreement of the Engineer. All applicable test certificates shall
have been first submitted to the Engineer.
M. All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and

satisfactory manner and in accordance with the provisions of the
Electricity Regulations and any relevant requirements of the local
authority.
N. Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or,

where several items of equipment are interdependent, the complete
plant shall operate continuously and satisfactorily under normal
operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without defect of any kind.
In the event of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent during
this period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the cause and
rectify it by means of repair, replacement, adjustment or modification
and the reliability run shall be re-commenced. All materials, equipment
and labor required to locate and rectify any such defect shall be
provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
O. No plant, equipment or installation shall be considered as complete until

the prescribed commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily
carried out and the reliability run has been completed without untoward
incident.
P. The Engineer shall have power to require that the whole of the plant,
equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected
and, if necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the

Contractual maintenance period.
3.27. TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER INSTALLATION
A. Earth continuity tests on conduit and trunking shall be checked and

confirmed prior to commencing wiring.
B. Tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60364, and shall also
include the following: -
1. Conductive parts - test conductive parts simultaneously accessible with

exposed conductive parts of extraneous conductive paths.
2. Generally conductive paths are not extraneous conductive paths if

separate from earth by an impedance of greater than 50M Ohms.
Confirm conductive paths are bonded to equipotential zone earth bar
by an impedance not exceeding 0.1 Ohms.
3. Prospective short circuit current (IP) - To determine suitability of terminal

and intermediate equipment the values of IP shall be measured (unless
these can be verified by alternative means).
4. Pressure tests (see below)
5. Full load test (1-hour duration)
C. During the full load test voltage and current readings at the final sub-
circuit, sub-main and main intake positions shall be taken. This test shall
be carried out at the completion of works and again (at the discretion
of the Engineer) at the end of defects period.
D. In the event of any test failing to comply, that test and those proceeding
(the results which may have been influenced by the fault) shall be
repeated after rectification of the report.
E. The Contractor shall include for the supply all test instruments and labor
required to complete the testing and commissioning works. Tests shall
only be carried out by competent persons.
F. The Engineer shall be given at least seven working days’ notice in writing

of the time when it is proposed to carry out any test to enable him to be
present during the test(s) if required.
G. Serial numbers of all test instruments shall be logged and noted on results
sheets. All instruments shall have a current calibration certificate.
H. Duplicate typewritten copies of the completed test reports shall be

forwarded to the Engineer within seven days of the date when the tests
are carried out.
I. The test certificate shall clearly state the following: -
1. Serial number of test instrument use
2. Apparatus or Section under test
3. Makers name, if any, or equipment installed
4. Nature, duration and conditions of test
5. Results of test
6. Any particulars required to comply with IEC Regulations etc., together

with particulars requested elsewhere in the specification
7. Name of personnel involved in test
8. Date of test
J. No test shall be valid until the test certificates are provided.
3.28. TESTING INSTRUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall submit with his Tender a full list of instruments,
together with relevant standards, which he intends to use in the testing
of the works. The Contractor shall include the full cost of regular
calibration test to be carried out on all instruments used and the cost of
any necessary recalibration. Certified documentation confirming
current certificate calibration shall be available for examination by the
Engineer at all times. Instruments not supported by up-to-date
calibration certificates shall not be used and shall be removed from site
immediately by the Contractor.

B. All instruments necessary to conducting the test shall be provided by the

Contractor including the following minimum range: -
1. RCD Test Unit (230 V a/c)
2. Earth continuity tester
3. Clamp-on ammeter (all ranges)
4. Earth loop impedance tester
5. Polarity tester
6. Megger test - 500 volts, 1000 volts and 5000 volts
7. Phase sequence tester
8. Sound meter
9. HV pressure test unit
10. Primary and secondary injection testers
11. Continuity tester
12. Prospective short circuit current test unit
C. Test instruments shall not be of the stop-go type, but shall indicate the
impedance value etc. directly in ohms with means of measuring the
correction for voltage variations.
3.29. CABLE TESTING
A. As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and jointing

of the cables specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables,
the Contractor shall carry out the tests described below, together with
such other tests and measurements to prove compliance with this
specification and with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. An insulation resistance test, carried out with an insulation resistance

tester or other similar type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation
resistance between each conductor and the remaining conductors
and between each conductor and the metallic sheath, if any and
armouring. The test voltage to be applied shall be as follows: -

1. Low Voltage Cables - 500 Volts
C. An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable
armouring and metal sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to
earth.
D. Phase-rotation and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that

the cables have been correctly connected.
3.30. PRESSURE TESTING OF LV CABLES
A. At the Engineer’s discretion, pressure tests shall be carried out on all

armoured cables of 25mm sq. and above with lengths exceeding 5
metres. The tests shall be made with isolators and switches in the open
position and under competent supervision to ensure the non-
occurrence of accident to persons, installation or building.
B. The Tenderer shall include for the application of a DC test voltage which
is gradually increased to the full value and maintained for 5 minutes
between conductors and between each conductor and armouring,
the voltage to be in accordance with the following tables: -
D.C. TEST VOLTAGE
CABLE VOLTAGE BETWEEN EACH DESIGNATION CONDUCTORS

CONDUCTOR & SHEATH
600/ 1,000 3,500 3,500
1,900/ 3,300 10,000 7,000
3,800/ 6,600 20,000 15,000
6,350/11,000 34,000 25,000
C. The Contractor shall prepare and submit with his Tender a schedule of
recommended test equipment suitable for technician grade
maintenance staff to assess whether the commissioned standards are
being maintained.
D. Notwithstanding the above, the Tenderer shall include for simulation of

fault conditions in the installation to ensure that all alarms, controls,

indicators and safety devices operate correctly and subsequent re-

setting to the correct operating conditions.
E. In addition, the simulation of fault conditions in the normal electricity

supply system to ensure that the emergency supply changeover
contactors, sensing circuits, phase failure relays, timers etc. operate
correctly and the subsequent re-setting of the network to the correct
operating conditions shall also be included.
F. Test equipment shall be provided with an insulated and shrouded probe

with flexible lead for testing metalwork such as switch plates, roof
supports, trusses etc.
3.31. ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS CHECK/TEST REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED

BY THE CONTRACTOR DURING THE INSTALLATION
A. The whole of the work shall be continuously checked throughout the

installation period to ensure complete safety and compliance with the
specification.
B. Switchgear shall be checked for correct labelling, complete circuit

schedules and satisfactory operation by hand. Interlocking facilities shall
also be checked for correct operation.
C. Clearances around switchgear for operation and maintenance shall be

checked for adequacy.
D. Distribution board labels shall be checked for correctness and

completion. MCB ratings to be verified against circuit schedules and
specification. MCB boards to be checked for satisfactory operation by
hand.
E. The radius of all cable bends shall be checked as shall the provision of
mechanical protection and cable shrouds.
F. Cable trenches shall be checked for dimensions and spacing between

services, the provision of earthenware ducts, cable tiles, identification
tapes and route markers.
G. All switches and control arrangements to be checked against drawings

and for operation.
H. Labelling and engraving to be checked for compliance with drawings

and specification.
I. Luminaires to be inspected for operation and correct colour and rating

of lamps.
J. Sockets and fused spur units shall be checked to ensure: -
1. Compatibility with specification and drawings
2. Labelling and engraving are in accordance with the specification and

drawings.
K. Three phase power outlets shall be checked to ensure:
1. Provision is in accordance with specification and drawings.
2. Labelling and engraving are in accordance with the specification and

drawings.
L. The test procedure shall also incorporate a visual inspection of the

installation including equipment, subways, walkways, crawl-ways, and
false ceilings where accessible, together with the items scheduled in IEC
60364.
M. On completion and if considered necessary at the end of the defect’s

liability period, the installation shall be inspected by the Engineer for
compliance with the Specification.
N. On completion of the tests and inspection the Contractor shall submit

duplicate copies of the certificates as prescribed in IEC 60364.
O. When carrying out work on, or extension to an existing system, the

Contract shall report any defect observed in the existing system to the
Engineer.
3.32. TESTING OF SPECIALIST EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting tests and

commissioning proposals for the Engineer’s approval/comment for all

specialist equipment and system supplied under the Contract.
B. This shall include such items as recording sound level of fire and voice
alarms etc.
C. During any such test all safety devices shall be tested and faults
simulated on the system.
D. In addition to the above the Tenderer shall include for tests on the
wiring/cabling for such services as Fire and Voice Alarms,
Intercommunication systems, General Alarms, Audio Visual Systems and
TV and Radio Systems to be made prior to the terminal equipment being
connected but with the cable terminations completed, in order to
preclude damage to the terminal equipment and to obviate any
adverse effects on the test results.
3.33. OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
A. Conform to the requirements of the main contract conditions in addition

to those of this section.
B. To ensure that the Client’s staff retain a permanent record of the

installation, the Contract shall include for editing, printing, binding and
producing operation and maintenance manuals to the approval of the
Engineer.
C. Prior to printing, three draft copies of each booklet shall be submitted

for the Engineers approval, one month prior to the Contract completion.
The Engineer reserves the right to modify the draft copies prior to printing
without incurring additional cost to the Tender price.
D. The manuals shall be written in such a manner to convey precise

information to enable that individual installation to be satisfactorily
operated and maintained by trained personnel. Completed manuals
shall be of a standard and finish equal to this specification with durable
binders and properly printed covers. The manuals shall have a
comprehensive index and be compiled into sections in ring binders for
each system of the installation, i.e. L.V. Switchgear, fire alarms, etc. and

include the following: -
E. Familiarize and description section outlining overall philosophy of

project/system.
1. Method of operation, including procedures to initiate emergency

shutdown and re-start the system.
2. Maintenance schedules broken down into periodic routines i.e. daily,

weekly, monthly etc.
3. Fault finding, routines and emergency procedures (including telephone

numbers).
4. Manufacturers catalogues as relevant to this installation, general

catalogues not acceptable.
5. List of relevant as installed drawings.
6. Reduced scale schematics and wiring diagrams.
7. Manufacturers drawings.
8. Schedules of equipment, to include luminaire/lamp type etc.
9. Manufacturers test certificates and warranties.
10. Manufacturers recommended spare parts, together with

manufacturer/supplier, reference numbers, and contact
address/telephone number.
11. Commissioning test results.
F. The manual shall contain all necessary warnings to ensure the health
and safety of the general public together with operating and
maintenance staff.
3.34. INSTRUCTION OF CLIENTS STAFF
A. The Client’s staff shall be instructed in the operation and maintenance

of all aspects of the plant. The instruction shall be carried out by qualified
personnel, who shall be fully conversant with the project.
3.35. STARTING UP

A. Provide services of skilled technician(s) for a minimum of two

consecutive full months, to start in its proper sequence, and to
thoroughly explain the operation and maintenance of each system
provided to the full satisfaction of Client or his representative. In addition,
provide specialized instructions by the respective manufacturers as
described under the appropriate clauses of this specification. Arrange
with the Client the most suitable time for instructions to their operating
and maintenance personnel. Keep a record of dates and durations of
each instruction period together with the name(s) of person(s) to whom
the instructions were given. Submit one signed copy of such record to
the Engineer.
3.36. TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE
A. Temporary and trial usage by Client of any mechanical or electrical

device, machinery, apparatus, equipment, plant or any other work or
materials supplied before final completion and written acceptance
shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same by the
Client.
B. The Client shall have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage, as
soon as Contractor shall claim that said work is completed and in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications, for such reasonable
length of time as is deemed to be sufficient for making a complete and
thorough test of same. Claims for damage shall not be made by
Contractor for the injury to or breaking of any parts of such work which
may be used, whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural
parts or by effective materials or workmanship of any kind whatsoever.
3.37. SCHEDULE OF OUTSTANDING ITEMS AND DEFECTS
A. Until the installation is finally taken over as complete the Contractor shall
be responsible for any necessary protection and maintenance of the
installation.
B. On completion of the Contract an inspection of the installation shall be

made by the Engineer, during which a schedule of outstanding items

shall be prepared.
C. All items included in this schedule shall be attended to within fourteen

days of the date of the inspection.
3.38. RECORD DRAWINGS (FINAL DRAWINGS BY CONTRACTOR)
A. Conform to the requirements of the main contract conditions in addition

to those of this section.
B. Within one month before completion of the works, the Contract shall
include for the provision of preliminary copies of drawings fully illustrated
the work as actually installed to the scales given below.
C. The drawings shall comprise plans and such sections as the Engineer
may consider necessary to show all required information clearly and
accurately to enable satisfactory maintenance and installation
extensions to be effected in the future.
D. The drawings shall clearly indicate the accurate location, size, materials
and services installed, together with cable, conduit and trunking runs
including joint boxes.
E. In addition, detailed drawings shall be provided for all fixed plant,

including alternators, transformers, switchgear etc., as applicable.
F. The drawings to be provided are generally as follows but should follow

the design set content (progressed to installation standard content):
Drawing Content Scale

Mains and distribution Schematic diagrams of complete
Lighting and general installation
purpose power and data installation The drawing shall be to 1:100 scale or
the scale of the Engineers Drawings
ELV and communication systems for these services whichever is the
Fire Detection and Alarm System greater
Ancillary services installation Site plan with outside lighting and all
Schematic diagrams of complete buried cable routes to 1:200 scale
installation N/A
Wiring diagrams for all control panels L.V. N/A
switch gear and fire/voice alarm, security
etc.

G. Two paper prints of these drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer

for comment before the final copies are produced and issued.
H. A spare set of working drawing prints shall be kept on site in order that
all conduit runs, positions of points, etc., can be checked by the
Engineer at any time to ensure that an accurate and comprehensive
record is maintained of the installation at all times.
I. Finally, the following copies of the As Installed Record Drawings shall be

provided by the Contractor for issue to the Client: -
1. Three paper prints of each drawing.
2. AutoCAD versions on a compact disk (CD)
J. Paper prints of manufacturer’s final working drawings of items of plant

and equipment shall be included with the manufacturer’s literature in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
K. It shall be especially noted that the Client shall not accept handover of
the installation until full information concerning the installation is in the
possession of his operation and maintenance staff and therefore a
Taking Over Certificate shall not be issued until the Contractor has
supplied all the information.
L. The final copies of the Record Drawings shall be submitted to the

Engineer within one month of the completion of the works.
M. The Contract shall include all associated costs for providing the Record
Drawings. The Final Certificate shall not be issued until the drawings are
received and are to the reasonable satisfaction of the Engineer.
N. The Engineers comments on the presentation of the Record Drawings

shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation for the accuracy of the
draft print and the final computer-generated copies. It shall be
especially noted that the Client shall not accept handover of the
installation until full information concerning the installation is in the
possession of the operational and maintenance staff and therefore the
Certificate of Practical Completion cannot be issued until the Record

Drawings are available.
3.39. TOC (TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE)
A. When the Contractor has demonstrated to the complete satisfaction of

the Engineer that the works are operating as intended within the design
limits and tolerances of the manufactured items, then the Engineer shall
issue a certificate of taking over, subject to the clearance of any
outstanding items or defects within 14 days of the date of the Certificate
and the responsibility for the operation of the plant shall pass from the
Contractor to the Client or as otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
B. This Certificate shall not be authorized until all items in this clause have
been cleared to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
3.40. CERTIFICATE OF MAKING GOOD DEFECTS
A. The Contractor shall carry out a thorough detailed examination of the

installations between the eleventh and twelfth month of the defects
liability period and shall put right any outstanding works or defects that
might have occurred under the Defects Liability Period in the Conditions
of Contract.
B. On completion of such works, and agreement that the requirements of

the Conditions of Contract and Specification have been met, the
Engineer shall authorize a Certificate of Making Good Defects.
End of Section 26 02 00

SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORKS
Electrical Scope of Works Section 26 05 00 - 0

SECTION 26 05 00
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
PART 1 |GENERAL ...................................................................................................................1

1.1. INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................1
1.2. DEFINITIONS ...............................................................................................................3
1.3. STANDARD OF WORK ...............................................................................................3
1.4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................3
1.5. PROJECT DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................4
1.6. OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................................5
1.7. DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS ...........................................................................5
1.8. INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR ..................................................5
1.9. SPECIALIST SYSTEM DESIGN DEVELOPMENT BY THE CONTRACTOR ......................6
PART 2 |SCOPE OF WORKS ...................................................................................................7
2.1. ELECTRICAL SERVICES GENERAL..............................................................................7
2.2. SEPARATE SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE) ...................................................................8
2.3. INCOMING POWER SUPPLY .....................................................................................8
2.4. MAIN LV SWITCH BOARDS ........................................................................................9
2.5. SUB DISTRIBUTION ....................................................................................................10
2.6. FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS .................................................................................10
2.7. MECHANICAL CONTROL CENTERS ........................................................................10
2.8. SWITCHGEAR COMPONENTS (NOT APPLICABLE) ................................................11
2.9. BUSBAR TRUNKING (NOT APPLICABLE) ..................................................................12
2.10. ELECTRONIC SURGE PROTECTION .........................................................................14
2.11. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE) .......................................14
2.12. MAINS POWER CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ...............................................................14
2.13. CABLE TRAY, LADDER RACK, TRUNKING, BASKET AND CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS
15
2.14. CAST-IN INSERTS ......................................................................................................16
2.15. FIRE BARRIERS AND FIRE TRANSITS ..........................................................................16
2.16. CABLE WIRING SYSTEMS .........................................................................................17
2.17. POWER CABLES .......................................................................................................17
2.18. SUPPLIES TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................18
2.19. SMALL POWER .........................................................................................................18
2.20. WIRING ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................19
2.21. INTERNAL LIGHTING ................................................................................................19
2.22. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS ................................................................................21
2.23. EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM .............................................................................21
2.24. EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEMS ......................................................................22
2.25. FUNCTIONAL EARTHING .........................................................................................23
2.26. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ..........................................................................23
2.27. PRODUCTS ...............................................................................................................24
2.28. TESTING, WITNESS AND COMMISSIONING HANDOVER AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS 25
2.29. TRAINING OF EMPLOYERS STAFF ............................................................................27
2.30. WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES....................................................................................28
PART 3 |EXECUTION .............................................................................................................28
3.1. GENERAL..................................................................................................................29

SECTION 260500 ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORKS
PART 1 | GENERAL
1.1. INTRODUCTION
A. This Specification relates to the Electrical Services associated with the

Villa (G+1+R+SB+Garage), Al Khwaneej Second, Dubai, UAE.
B. The following specification sections refer to British (BS) and International

Standards (IEC or EN). The contractor is to refer and comply with all such
standards in the supply, installation and commissioning of all systems and
provide a fully compliant bid accordingly.
C. The Division 26 Electrical Services will comprise the systems described

within the specification and as outlined on the drawings. The Contractor
will include for the supply, delivery to site, installation, erection and
connection of all equipment and ancillaries to form a Complete and Fit
for Purpose installation. This will include all working drawings, testing,
commissioning, operating and maintenance manuals, as fitted record
information and drawings, staff instructions and handover to the
Employer.
D. The Contractor will include for specialist equipment and systems to be

supplied, installed and commissioned by relevant specialist vendors and
suppliers. This will include but not be limited to:
1. Main incoming power supply
2. Coordination with local power authority
3. Main power distribution systems
4. Connection of local authority tails to LV switchboard
5. LV Switchboards, sub-main distribution boards and distribution boards
6. Power cabling installations – mains and essential
7. Cable containment systems
8. Small power installation
9. Lighting installation

10. Lighting Control
11. Emergency Lighting System
12. Specialist Lighting Control Systems
13. Lightning Protection
14. Earthing
E. This brief outline of the requirements will be read in conjunction with

Division 26 General Requirements and all other Contract
documentation.
F. This section of the specification details the work applicable to this

particular Project. The minimum standard of materials, systems and
acceptable installation is stated in the accompanying sections referred
to herein as the Electrical Services Standard Specification.
G. The Contractor will carry out the works as described herein and as shown
on the Contract drawings.
H. This specification covers the provision and installation of all the electrical
services for the Project, including coordination and supervision of the
electrical works.
I. The Contractor will include for the whole of the work involved and the
supply of all materials necessary for the satisfactory completion of the
electrical installation, as set down in this specification, schedules of
accompanying drawings and for the supply, delivery to site, offloading,
storing, protecting, taking out of store, putting into position, installation,
fixing, including any fixings brackets, plinths and builders work for items
of electrical equipment, inspecting, testing, attendance on other
trades, commissioning of the system and removal from the site of waste
material, described in detail herein, and as specified on the
accompanying drawings.
J. The positions of equipment, fittings, accessories etc., on the drawings

are approximate, final positions will be established during the Engineer’s
review of the Contractors’ Shop Drawings and subsequent Working
Drawings.

K. Should this section 260500 contradict any other Clauses of the

specification then the Clauses within Section 260500 will take
precedence.
1.2. DEFINITIONS
A. "Approval" means approval in writing by the Engineer or the Client’s

appointed representative.
B. "Provide" or "Supply" means unless otherwise stated, the supply, delivery,

installation, testing and commissioning of plant and equipment.
C. The "Engineer" means the company or organization appointed or

designated by the Employer to supervise the work.
D. “Specialist Vendor” or “Supplier” means any manufacturer or supplier of

equipment or system used to provide and install a particular section of
the overall scope. These will be appointed by the Division Electrical
Services trade to undertake the work on their behalf.
1.3. STANDARD OF WORK
A. The Contractor will employ suitably qualified tradesman to install the

electrical services to the highest standard and in accordance with all
regulations, standards and codes of practice. The minimum standard for
each service is laid down within this document.
B. The Contractor will ensure that items forming part of the electrical
services installation are installed to the manufacturer’s
recommendations, the standards quoted within this specification and
the following local approval authority requirements and regulations:
1. Local electrical power supply authority
2. Local telecommunications authority
3. Local Municipality Requirements
4. Specified employer requirements
C. The contractor is deemed to be suitably knowledgeable of local codes

and standards and will be required to have factored these into his price.
1.4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to the Contract documentation for restrictions on working times,

noisy operations, site access and for details of phasing of the works. The
Contractor will make due allowance in the Tender for these
requirements.
B. Ensure that all notices are adhered to with respect to down time or
disruption to existing services and provide all necessary temporary works
to ensure that operational areas continue to function normally.
C. Read this part of the specification in conjunction with the rest of the
specification and all associated documents and drawings.
D. The Contractor will provide supply, install, test and commission the
electrical services (including design development of all specialist
systems), as outlined within this Specification unless otherwise stated.
1.5. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The project Villa (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE) will be constructed at Plot

2828020 of the Al Khwaneej Second, Dubai, United Arab Emirates. The
total land area is 1444,27 m2. The project will have the following area:
1 MAIN VILLA
• Ground Floor Including all Rooms and Spaces.
• First Floor Including all Rooms and Spaces.
• Roof Floor and Mechanical Area
2 SERVICE BLOCK
• Kitchen
• Maid`s Room
• Laundry Room
• Storage Rooms
3 COVERED GARAGE
• Entrance One
• Entrance Two
4 Landscape, Associated roads and underground Services

• Boundary Walls
• Gates
• Lightings
• UG Water Tank and Pump room
• Gates
5 This work package Contract consists of the Electrical installations

required within Villa (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE), Al Khwaneej Second,
Dubai, UAE.
1.6. OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. The ambient conditions in Dubai are as follows: -
6 Cooling: 46oC DB, 29oC WB at mean coincident wet bulb
7 It is a requirement that all equipment apparatus, materials and

machines installed externally and in unconditioned spaces to be
suitably rated for continuous operation at not less than 50oC db.,
90% RH.
B. Precautions should also be taken to ensure the saline content in both

the ambient air and ground does not have any adverse effect on the
general operation of the plant, equipment or materials used on the
project. No claims will be accepted where material enhancement is
required to satisfy this clause to the Engineers satisfaction.
1.7. DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Contractor is responsible for the detailed design of systems and

details to the latest Local Authority Code and international references,
standards and codes of practices.
B. The relevant codes are listed below. Where Local Standards are not
comprehensive, best international practices (IEC or EN) will be applied.
1.8. INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
A. The following details outline the information which the Contractor will
provide during the course of the Contract to suit the master construction
programme.

1 Shop Drawings / Working Drawings for all aspects of the

installation.
2 Material submissions complete with full detailed compliance

statements in tick list form to ensure full compliance with relevant
contract specifications.
3 Detailed drawings and equipment schedules for specialist

systems as quoted and defined in this specification
4 Comprehensive submissions to local authority organization for

approval.
5 External ducting and cable routes
6 Lightning protection requirements for structural detailing
7 Builder’s work information for holes, plinths, chases, etc.
8 Setting out details and mounting heights to suit building

architecture and structure
9 Setting out details and mounting heights including co-ordination

with Interior Design drawings
10 Coordinated MEP Services Drawings
11 Coordinated Reflected Ceiling Plans
12 Samples
13 Site mark-ups indicating installation details
14 Record drawings, operating and maintenance manual, training

documentation, log-books, schematics, mimic diagrams.
C. The Contractor is responsible for detailed builder’s work and

coordination of wall and floor penetrations through structure including
dimensioned drawings showing coordinated setting out. Include full
coordination with all facets of the Contract.
1.9. SPECIALIST SYSTEM DESIGN DEVELOPMENT BY THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor will employ a specialist supplier/installer to develop the

detailed design and take delegated design responsibility for the final

detailing on the following systems:
3.40.C.1.a.1. Final selected Switchgear Discrimination Study
3.40.C.1.a.2. Specialist Lighting Controls
3.40.C.1.a.3. Lightning Protection and Earthing System
3.40.C.1.a.4. All specialist equipment selection and coordination
B. Notwithstanding the drawings and other information provided to the

Contractor, the Contractor will be fully responsible for the final design,
detailing of the works described herein, including (without limitation) the
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, and will provide a complete and secure installation, which will
meet the specified performance and design requirements indicated
and which will be fit for their intended purpose. The Contractor should
request and retain the relevant professional indemnity insurance for the
final developed design completed by the specialist system
PART 2 | SCOPE OF WORKS
2.1. ELECTRICAL SERVICES GENERAL
A. The Contractor will, supply, install, calculate, test, commission, verify and
handover the complete electrical services installations in accordance
with the Contract Preliminaries and Conditions and as described within
this specification, general technical preliminaries specification,
applicable sections of the standard specification for Electrical
Engineering Services and as outlined on the Tender drawings.
B. The scope of work will comprise, but not be limited to the following:
2 Liaison with DEWA for coordination of the installation of DEWA

equipment:
a. Incoming power supply
3 LV Switch rooms
4 Main and Sub switchboards
5 Cabling and wiring Systems
6 Cable tray, ladder rack, trunking and conduit installations

7 Busbar trunking (NOT APPLICABLE)
8 BMS connectivity for associated metering via Modbus (NOT

APPLICABLE)
9 Electronic surge protection
10 Final Distribution Boards
11 Small power installation and provision of accessories
12 Supplies to all mechanical plant and equipment
13 Fire resistant cabling to all Life Safety systems
14 Internal lighting
15 BOH / circulation space lighting
16 Power supplies to External feature lighting
17 Emergency lighting system
18 Lighting control systems
19 Earthing and bonding systems
20 Functional earthing
21 Lightning protection
22 Testing, witness and commissioning of all systems
23 Demonstration of all systems to client
24 Comprehensive O&M manuals and AS BUILT drawings for all

systems
25 System Warranties
Provide all necessary project management personnel, skilled labor and

trained installation technicians required to complete the works in
accordance with the main Contract programme.
2.2. SEPARATE SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE)
2.3. INCOMING POWER SUPPLY
A. The incoming 11kV power supply will be taken from DEWA using
underground power cables. Low voltage system will be 400/230V, 3
Phase, 4 Wire, solidly earthed neutral.
D. Medium voltage transformer will be supplied by DEWA, including

reconstruction of substation plinths, manholes, cable trenches/ducts
and installation and connection of associated Medium Voltage and
Low Voltage cables.
E. The exact arrangement of the supply cabling is to be determined with

DEWA. A meeting is necessitated to confirm.
F. The Contractor is to allow adequate time to liaise and meet with DEWA
and provide all required interfaces and attendances to ensure that all
their requirements are met to enable all required NOC’s, completions
and handover.
G. Cables will enter the building into cable trenches in accordance with
DEWA standard details.
2.4. MAIN LV SWITCH BOARDS
A. The Main LV Switchboards shall comply with DEWA requirements and

shall be constructed to all relevant BS/EN standards to Form 2, having
a fault rating of 50kA for 3 seconds and suitability rated for the high
operating conditions experienced in Dubai.
H. Alternative source of energy in the form of an on-grid photovoltaic

system will be incorporated on the design. This will be mainly utilized
during the day. Then during night time, electricity will be drawn from the
electrical grid.
I. Main Distribution Boards located inside the EE room will be provided to

serve to the main components of the project.
J. A kWHr meter by a DEWA meter is placed near the property line to serve
as electricity metering in accordance with their specification and their
circulars. DEWA will provide the meters. Final metering provisions to be
coordinated with the Local Supply Authority.
K. Plan layout spaces on the Engineers drawings for all main and sub-main
electrical equipment, and provide materials and equipment enclosures
to ensure adequate space is afforded in rooms.

L. Review the position of the distribution boards/panelboards in relation to

containment routes and provide suitable steelwork supports to suit.
M. Ensure the Main Distribution Boards will comply to IEC 61439 and all
relevant Local
2.5. SUB DISTRIBUTION
A. The Sub distribution consists predominantly of cable feeders to supply to

the project’s electrical requirement like small power, lighting, AC, motor
loads, etc.
N. Check physical dimensions of Sub Distribution Boards prior to

manufacture of same, carry out space and volume check to ensure
enclosures are adequately sized.
O. Where isolator ratings are not indicated on design drawings, the

contractor will ensure that they provide a rating greater than the Circuit
Protective Device feeding to it.
P. Ensure all Sub Distribution Boards comply to IEC 61439 and all relevant
Local Standards. SDB’s will be Form 2B Type 2, IP 31 min.
2.6. FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. Final Distribution Boards will be provided to serve to BOH circulation

spaces, corridors, car parking, plant rooms etc.
Q. Check physical dimensions of Final distribution boards prior to

manufacturer of same, carry out space and volume check to ensure
enclosures are adequately sized.
R. Provide supplies to Distribution boards within retail and Coffee Shop

areas of the type specified.
S. Provide space within Distribution Boards to allow din-rail mounted

controls, circuit monitoring, metering etc. to be located. Generally,
lighting is to be locally controlled.
T. Ensure all Final Distribution Boards comply to IEC 61439 and all relevant
Local Standards. FDB’s will be Form 2 Type 2, IP 31 min.
2.7. MECHANICAL CONTROL CENTERS

A. Power supplies to mechanical equipment will be derived from MDBs and

ME-SDB’s (mechanical sub distribution boards) and will terminate into
isolators adjacent to each mechanical equipment control
center/panel. Local Mechanical Control Centers (MCCs) will include all
VFD’s, starters, protection devices, contactors to serve and control items
of plant and equipment. Local MCC’s will be provided as part of the
Building Services engineering by the Mechanical trade contractors, as
identified in Division 23 – HVAC, Division 22 – Plumbing and Division 21 –
Fire protection.
U. Provide detailed coordination with Mechanical Services trades to

ensure all power supplies are correctly sized and located for the
Mechanical trade contractors selected plant item.
V. Provide starters and switches to individual plant items in accordance

with specification and in order to meet DEWA requirements related to
maximum starting currents.
W. Isolators for mechanical plant will be located adjacent to Mechanical

control panels/MCC with LV
X. cables contained by tray and trunking containment system back to the

ME-SDB.
Y. Provide a dedicated BMS interfaces and a secondary cat.6 utp

cable/modbus to every Motor Control Centre/ME-SDB/VFD for
connection to BMS outstation/controller via the structured cabling
network. Provide full metering information to the BMS (kW, KWh, KVA, A,
V, PF, MD, THD) via modbus protocol.
2.8. SWITCHGEAR COMPONENTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. All Main Switchboards, Sub-Main Switchboards and FDB’s will be

manufactured by the same vendor, and complete with common
components throughout. A mixture of breakers, contactors, devices and
components from more than one manufacturer will not be acceptable.
Z. Provide all enclosures to same manufacturers standard paint finish.
AA. All components will be suitably rated and de-rated to operate in the
environmental conditions defined elsewhere within this document.
BB. Provide detailed co-ordination and discrimination study of all breakers

used. This will be carried out from the point of incoming supply, down to
the last socket and outlet point on the installation. This will be carried out
for both normal supply conditions and under generator supply
conditions.
CC. Provide under voltage relays, earth leakage trip devices and protection
equipment as required by the local power supply authority.
DD. Provide within each ACB and MCCB with an add-on facility for the later
introduction of motorized breakers, electronic trip relays and shunt trip
devices, even where not indicated on drawings.
EE. Ensure component compliance with IEC 60947 and Local Standards.
2.9. BUSBAR TRUNKING (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Supply, install, test and commission the busbar trunking systems including
factory manufactured flanges, joints, elbows, bends, tap-off boxes,
supports etc., as indicated on the drawings. All busbar and associated
installations will be in accordance with the standard specification.
FF. Provide busbar complete with MCCB tap-offs sized to suit each load
served.
GG. Tap-offs will be designed to allow safe connection and removal onto
the busbar system without having to isolate it at the switchboard. Refer
to the 61 series drawings for further information.
HH. Note the minimum requirement for IP rating and for ASTA certification,
as defined in the particular specification section. Copies of ASTA
certificates for the busbar ratings will be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
II. The busbar trunking will be properly aligned, and securely fixed at
spacings not exceeding 1.5m center (or less, if recommended by the
manufacturer), with support adequate to take the weight of the busbar
by means of galvanized fixing brackets; comprising hanger clamp, fixing
channel and damping screw, supplied by the busbar trunking
manufacturer.

JJ. Ensure spacing between busbars and between busbar and wall
surfaces is sufficient for access for removal of busbar sections and for
inspection of joints. All busbar joints are to be proven by thermographic
testing at testing and commissioning stage at full load conditions.
KK. Ensure that bottom of support arrangements in car park areas is

arranged to ensure that the clearance from finished floor (in publicly
accessible spaces) is not less than the minimum 2500mm clear height
required underneath all services as required by local municipality
requirements. Ensure routes are fully coordinated with slab thicknesses
and all architectural and structural details to ensure minimum
clearances are met.
LL. Additional supports will be supplied where required and where

recommended by the manufacturer, especially for high rise
applications to allow for building movement (horizontal and vertical).
MM. Carry out detailed co-ordination of installation and compatibility of

busbar trunking, transformers and switchgear as appropriate.
NN. Check and confirm structural penetrations through slabs and walls with
the Engineer prior to concrete pours or riser wall construction. Check
and confirm weights and key dimensions of the busbar trunking
installation to ensure adequate fit in existing builders work holes.
OO. Co-ordinate the rising busbar trunking, tap-offs, cable trays, ladder rack
and distribution boards within the riser prior to installation. Bus bar
fabricator to ensure that the busbars have at least three tap-off
connection points on each floor. Tap-offs to be positioned such that the
bottom of the tap-off unit will be at 900mm and 1500mm respectively
AFFL on each floor.
PP. The busbar manufacturer will carry out all necessary site measurements
to provide detailed fabrication drawings. The manufacturer will provide
installation, testing and commissioning, and training to the tradesman.
The manufacturer will also make regular visits to site to supervise the
installation works. The busbar manufacturer will provide test results to the
Engineer (via the Contractor) for the completed busbar system.

QQ. Types and size of busbar trunking proposed for this project will be
installed in similar projects within UAE and operating satisfactorily under
similar conditions for not less than 5 years.
2.10. ELECTRONIC SURGE PROTECTION
A. Provide transient over-voltage surge protection devices with BMS

interfaces (with date/time recordings) throughout the electrical
installation in accordance with the recommendations of IEC62305.
RR. Surge protection will comprise 3 main stages. “Coarse” protection will
be provided at all main Distribution Boards and at Sub Distribution
Boards. “Medium” protection will be provided at sub Distribution Boards.
“Fine” protection will be provided at distribution boards that serve to
electronic equipment.
SS. Provide transient over voltage protection equipment within switchgear

enclosures. Locate behind removable covers complete with vision
window to read LED status indicators.
TT. Provide electronic over voltage surge protection to all incoming power
and telecommunications cables entering and leaving the building
faraday cage.
2.11. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. The contractor will ensure to integrate the electrical/ELV installations to

the building management system to provide inputs, outputs and
monitoring of:
Lighting Control Systems
Emergency Lighting
Surge protection devices
Mains failure of any Incoming/outgoing way on Main LV Switchboard
2.12. MAINS POWER CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS
A. Mains power cables will be routed on underground concrete

encasement from the Main Distribution Board. Cables will be run where
possible within service corridors, ceiling voids and within riser space.

Exposed Cable tray within the car park will serve to distribution boards
to feed to lighting, power and mechanical services panels.
UU. Riser systems within the building B & C will allow cables to rise/drop to
the roof deck PV modules and other equipment they will require power
supply.
VV. Ensure cable ladder containing Local Electricity Authority transformer

feeder cables are installed strictly in accordance with LEA requirements
and the clearance above them required for access.
2.13. CABLE TRAY, LADDER RACK, TRUNKING, BASKET AND CONDUIT

INSTALLATIONS
A. The Contractor will include for the supply and installation of all cable
containment systems required for the project.
WW. Generally, all main and sub-main armoured and insulated cables will be
installed on ladder rack and cable tray as indicated on drawings.
B. Provide dedicated containment for all fire and voice alarm cables,
emergency lighting cables, AV/Security and Structured Cabling
Systems, etc.
C. Provide vertical cable tray support systems within all risers to support
cables as required.
D. Galvanized steel trunking will be provided where there are a number of

multiple circuit cables to be run. Generally, where three or more circuits
are to be run in a common route, then a galvanized steel trunking
system will be provided in place of conduit.
E. Ensure all cable trays and ladder racks are galvanized type. Cable tray
will be of the duty and type as defined in the particular specification
section.
F. Ensure all flanges, bends, T’s and associated parts of cable tray and
ladder rack are pre-manufactured parts free of sharp or burred ends.
Site-made bends, T’s or flanges will not be acceptable.
G. Where Cable Basket is specified, this should be stainless steel type.
H. Define main containment systems and their contents (cable IDs for main
power distribution and cable quantities for SCS etc.) and their routes on
a set of detailed and coordinated shop drawings. Add additional
containment systems as necessary to allow all cabling to be contained.
I. Provide surface mounted or concealed Galvanized steel conduits to

contain cables from the main tray or trunking route to the final
accessory, outlet or fixed termination point.
J. PVC conduits will only be permitted where these are embedded in

concrete walls or cast into the concrete structure of the building or
concealed within suspended ceiling voids. Heavy duty impact resistant
PVC conduit will be used.
K. Galvanized steel conduit will be used wherever the conduit is visible.
2.14. CAST-IN INSERTS
A. Provide cast-in inserts within the electrical and communications risers for
fixing and support of main vertical cable trays, ladder racks and trunking
systems as well for supporting main wall mounted equipment.
B. Inserts will be spaced at regular intervals and installed complete with

foam infill for easy removal and to prevent the ingress of concrete during
construction.
C. In risers that are already partly constructed without inserts, ensure that
inserts are consistent to provide exact verticality of busbar and rising
containment systems.
2.15. FIRE BARRIERS AND FIRE TRANSITS
A. Provide fire barriers for all service penetrations to maintain the fire-rating
of walls, floors, partitions, ceilings etc. This will be coordinated closely
with the Main Contractor who will close builders work openings to a
75mm perimeter around electrical service openings. The remaining
opening will be fire- sealed using intumescent foam-type materials.
Ensure that materials are installed suitably for installation of same and
co-ordinate accordingly.
XX. In riser closets, Tel risers, floors for ELV and mains power risers, floors will
be fire-sealed to provide two-hour fire ratings. Include for maintaining

the fire resistance within containment systems as described in the

containment specifications e.g. within cable trunking systems.
2.16. CABLE WIRING SYSTEMS
A. All power cables installed throughout the project will be LS0H (Low
Smoke Zero Halogen) outer sheath type. This is necessary to minimize
build-up of poisonous fumes in the event of fire. PVC cables will not be
used for the project.
YY. All cables will have LS0H outer sheaths including all UTP, Fibre Optic, fire
alarms, emergency lighting etc.
ZZ. Sub-main cables will be XLPE/SWA/LS0H type whilst final circuits will
generally be LS0H sheathed single core trunking and conduit type
cables.
AAA. Where cables feed to life safety equipment e.g. pressurization fans, fire
exhaust fans etc. then these will be fire retardant type cables with a Fire
rated outer sheath that is also LS0H with fire rated autonomy as per Local
Authority requirements. All fire-retardant cables will have copper
conductors.
2.17. POWER CABLES
A. All main and sub main cables within the building will be armoured, XLPE,
low smoke, Halogen free (XLPE/SWA/LS0H), rated as shown on the
drawings and cable schedules.
BBB. Provide Fire Rated cables to all Life Safety loads fed from generator.
CCC. The Contractor will supply, install, test and commission all main, sub main
and final distribution cabling and busbars serving all main switchboards,
sub-main switchboards, mechanical control panels, final distribution
boards, fixed items of plant, items of equipment, lighting points and
outlet accessories.
DDD. All cable conductors will be copper stranded type.
EEE. All main and sub-main cables will be provided with separate earth
protective conductors as shown on the drawings and cable schedules
and in accordance with local authority requirements.

FFF. All main and sub main cables will be supported throughout their length
on ladder rack or cable tray. Cables will not be cleated or clipped direct
to any surface without prior permission of the Engineer.
GGG. Final circuit wiring will either be plenum rated non-combustible or, if run,
through plenum voids that do not contain smoke detectors or sprinklers,
the cables will be contained within galvanized steel conduits. All wiring
terminations will be suitably contained to minimize any possibility of
combustion.
2.18. SUPPLIES TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Provide fixed power supplies from SMDB’s to all mechanical

plant/MCC’s and equipment points of isolation as indicated on layout
and/or schematic diagrams.
HHH. Coordinate the exact requirements for power supply load, starting
device, drive and rating of protective devices with the selected and
approved Mechanical plant and equipment.
III. Provide fire rated essential supply for Life Safety loads including sprinkler
pumps, smoke exhaust fans, etc.
2.19. SMALL POWER
A. The contractor will provide distributed small power supplies throughout

the building, including all Bedrooms, toilets, corridors, plant and
equipment rooms, car park and external areas.
JJJ. The Distribution Boards (FDBs) in each buildings and other areas are to
be located in the specific niches formed in walls. Ensure to follow I.D
drawing setting out for the exact location of FDBs. Ensure their
compliance with DEWA standards.
KKK. The Contractor will include for power supplies to all shell & core and
landlord areas (including all plant/control rooms) as shown on the
drawings.
LLL. Cleaner sockets will be provided allowing a of 8m maximum distance to

a socket, from any position.
MMM. Provide external feeder pillars to support landscape and external

lighting requirements, as indicated on the drawings.
NNN. The Contractor will allow for, coordinate, supply, install and test all
required small power outlets and associated cabling required for
specialist system provider’s equipment such as Lighting control panels,
fire alarm panels, BMS outstations, Aircraft warning light supplies, rotating
doors, car barriers, FCC, mechanical services control panels, etc.
2.20. WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. The Contractor will include for the installation of lighting switches, small
power outlets, Voice/Data outlets and accessories as indicated on
drawings. This will include, but not be limited to, general purpose outlets,
socket outlets, outlets within common areas, outlets for cleaners use,
IP65 rated outlets for external use and for use in plant rooms and
switch/non-switched fused outlets for fixed equipment.
OOO. Unless stated otherwise, all outlets and accessories will be of the
switched type.
PPP. All wiring will be concealed in trunking and conduit installation

throughout. Allow for the design and installation of all pathways as
required.
QQQ. ID Specifications for outlet finishes must be followed for all areas.
RRR. Wiring accessory plates for all finish types will be provided by a single
manufacturer throughout the project.
SSS. Setting-out of all switches, socket outlets and wiring accessories will be
as per the Interior Designer setting-out drawings.
2.21. INTERNAL LIGHTING
A. The Contractor will supply, install, test and commission a complete

lighting installation to all core areas of the project.
TTT. Refer to the ID lighting Layout drawings, specifications and control

schedules for further details.
UUU. Energy efficient fittings are to be used throughout - LED downlights in

apartments and LED, CFL or T5 fluorescent in some areas, etc. Lighting
selection will need to strictly follow the specified wattages and
proposed quality to ensure the restricted building load is achieved.
VVV. The lighting will utilize luminaires only from the approved luminaire
schedule and list of manufacturers.
WWW. Wiring for the lighting will be carried out using a minimum stranded
2.5mm2 LS0H copper cables for live, neutral and earth conductors
installed in trunking and conduit.
XXX. Final connections to all ceiling mounted luminaires will be via plug and
socket type ceiling roses. Ensure that lighting sockets are coordinated
with mechanical equipment and mounted in an accessible location to
allow future luminaire maintenance and replacement.
YYY. Lighting sockets are to be allowed in some areas. These are to be

controlled from the local lighting switch. 5A lighting sockets are to be
provided.
ZZZ. Surface mounted fittings in car parks and stairs will be hard-wired via
recessed/cast-in conduit backboxes over which the luminaire will be
mounted.
AAAA. Where luminaires are installed within suspended ceilings they will be
individually supported unless the ceiling support system is specifically
designed to cater for the weight of the luminaires. Contractor to issue a
formally written notification from the ceiling provider to confirm weight
allowances are acceptable.
BBBB. Submit technical details and samples of all luminaires for approval prior
to any order of equipment. Use only approved suppliers. Provide mock-
up sample of the lighting for the ID/Engineer to review.
CCCC. Luminaires will comply with EN60598. Photometric data will

comply with EN60064. Submit photometric calculations of all areas
indicating lux levels achieved by the proposed luminaire to the Engineer
for review. All luminaires will be complete with internal fuse.
DDDD.Electronic High Frequency type control gear will be provided for all
fluorescent luminaries.
EEEE. All luminaires are to be as per the Luminaire Schedule included with this

specification.
FFFF. Where there are switches shown in individual rooms then they control
the light fittings in which the switch is located e.g. plant rooms, risers,
where it is obvious switch connection lines are not shown.
GGGG. Where there are presence detectors shown and switch lines are
not shown connected to the light fittings or circuits then the detectors
control the luminaires in that area or the luminaire circuit adjacent to it,
e.g. where lift lobby areas show at least 2 PIRs then these are connected
to those lift lobby fittings and ditto corridor.
2.22. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. All areas will be controlled by a local switch except for the

landscape/external and car park areas which is by Lighting Control
Panel.
2.23. EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Non-maintained emergency light with a minimum of 3 hours battery

backup will be provided in order to create a continuity of the lighting
during mains power failure.
HHHH. The Contractor will provide emergency lighting control panels, batteries,
inverters, cabling, changeover devices and luminaires for all building
areas as shown on the drawings.
IIII. Generally, LED ceiling lights, downlights and bulkheads will be provided
in residential corridors and lobbies in plantrooms, stair cases and car
parks throughout the building.
JJJJ. Wiring to the emergency luminaires will be by fire-retardant cables with

LSF/LSOH outer sheaths.
KKKK. Emergency exit signage luminaires will incorporate pictograms in

accordance with European signs directive “Running Man symbols”. The
symbol orientation will be selected to suit the direction of the escape
route. The selection of signs will be coordinated with the Local Authority
and Engineer.
LLLL. All emergency lights will be Civil Defense approved. The contractor is

responsible to submit only compliant fixtures and systems.
MMMM. The system may be AC or DC as long as minimum lighting levels

and all monitoring and testing objectives are achieved.
2.24. EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEMS
A. Grounding system will be provided in accordance with the codes. All

metallic parts of the electrical installation will be securely bounded to a
local grounding system connected to the common grounding system.
Clean grounding system will be provided for instrumentation and
communication system.
NNNN. Compliant DEWA installation requires space to accommodate driven

earth electrode rods into open soft ground.
B. Provide separate earthing systems in accordance with local authority

regulations IT installations. Combine earthing systems only at the closest
point within the building to the earth electrodes and only where the
local authority allows the earthing of different syst ems to be combined.
C. DEWA will provide their own earthing to transformers and RMUs.
D. Earth pits, complete with earth electrode rods are to be installed within
the area between the building plot line and the service road outside
each of the sub-stations located at Ground level.
E. Provide conduit pathways for connecting earth pits to HV, LV, and ELV
rooms as required.
F. Should it be required, provide additional earth electrode and earth mat

configurations in accordance with local authority requirements and in
compliance with Local Standards as well as international standards and
the design drawings.
G. The earthing installation is subject to local authority inspection hence

must be ensured to be in compliance with all local authority standards.
H. Provide earth bars on isolated stand-offs within HV and LV rooms for

bonding of main and ancillary electrical services components. Provide
copper cable/strip connection to earth pits and between adjacent
earth bars all as shown on Series 69 detail design drawings.

OOOO. Bond all exposed metallic parts of the building fabric and services
installations to the various electrical earth bars to maintain zero potential
between metalwork components within and upon the building i.e. the
full earthing and bonding installation in accordance with local authority
and the National Electrical Code, with the exception of the earth pits
which will conform to IEC 62305.
PPPP. Include for the full installation, commissioning and setting to work of the
Earthing and Bonding Installations in accordance with BS 7430 and as
indicated in the particular specification section for earthing.
QQQQ. Provide bonding to all ancillary equipment such as ceiling grids,

metal wall partitions, fixed metal shelving, building cladding/facade
and structural steelwork that form part of the shell and core installation.
RRRR. At this stage the total number of earth rods is only estimated and tests
would need to be carried out on site to determine the number required
to obtain the required resistance of less than 1 Ω and in compliance with
the requirements of the Local Supply Authority (DEWA).
2.25. FUNCTIONAL EARTHING
A. Provide a separate clean earth connection from dedicated electrodes

to each clean earth bar in the ELV room.
SSSS. Provide bonding of main and ancillary data/voice/AV system

components. Provide copper cable/strip connection to earth pits and
between associated earth bars. Refer to detail design drawings for
further details.
TTTT. Provide clean earth system for all communications and IT systems.
UUUU. Provide a separate earthing system for the main Telecom Service
Provider rooms to the Local Authorities requirements.
VVVV. Allow for six additional spare 1ohm earth electrode connections (no. of
electrodes per connection to meet 1-ohm requirement) located within
the road.
2.26. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Provide and install a complete lightning protection system (Early

Streamer Emission) and its corresponding components to the whole

building. The principle of the system will utilize the structural steelwork
and reinforcing as supplementary paths to earth but dedicated copper
down conductors sized to operate independently of the structure will be
provided.
WWWW. All exposed metallic parts of the building including façade

cladding, roof framework, structural steelwork, balcony railings etc. will
be bonded into the lightning protection system.
XXXX. Employ a system specialist to carry out detailed design and installation
of the system and prove the designed installation by testing each of the
down conductor paths using long-lead tests to ensure no down
conductor resistance path exceeds 0.2ohms.
YYYY. An early works package contractor will bond all of the steel reinforcing
to shoring wall piles and also make a bonding connection from
designated columns to the raft’s steel structural mesh. The MEP
contractor will take over the installation work and have the early works
package contractor prove his work by continuity test from column
connection to earth.
2.27. PRODUCTS
A. All materials and equipment will be new and will support a quality
certificate e.g. BSI “kite mark”, or manufactured under an internationally
recognized scheme such as ISO9001 or equivalent. If this is not possible,
products manufactured to the relevant Local Standard with approved
certificates from a recognized laboratory testing facility, will be
accepted by the Engineer, subject to the Contractor providing detailed
documentary evidence that the former conditions cannot be satisfied.
ZZZZ. All materials and equipment will be delivered to site in original

manufacturer’s packaging and will remain unopened until time of use.
AAAAA. All materials will be stored on site in ventilated container systems.

Where equipment contains sensitive electronic components susceptible
to high ambient conditions, store same in a temperature/dust-controlled
environment.

2.28. TESTING, WITNESS AND COMMISSIONING HANDOVER AND

MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor will be responsible for testing, witnessing and

commissioning of the complete electrical and ELV systems in
accordance with the standard specification for Electrical Engineering
services general technical requirements and as detailed below.
BBBBB. The Division 26, 27 and 28 trades (including appointed specialist

commissioning personnel) will include for regular meetings with the
Engineer during the course of the contract with a minimum of 4 (four)
dedicated pre-commissioning workshops to comprehensively review
details of system commissioning provisions.
CCCCC. Carry out the testing, commissioning, proving and demonstration

of all mechanical and associated electrical systems within the contract
programme including cause and effect of all interrelated systems.
Provide management of all the above-mentioned activities and liaise
with the Engineer. As a minimum requirement, provide the following
scope of management functions.
1 Review interface of all packages and construction programmes

to formulate a structured commissioning programme. Issue a
copy of the proposed structured commissioning programme with
the Tender return.
2 Preparation of method statements for commissioning procedures

of all systems.
3 Advise on test points/access panels/access equipment, etc. to

enable commissioning to be competed efficiently.
4 Produce standard documentation for the pre-

commissioning/testing/ acceptance of systems.
5 Manage the commissioning progress of each discipline

individually and co-ordinate the interface of disciplines by
carrying out the following duties:
a Test method: Test joint sealants according to Method A,

Field- Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in appendix X1
in ASTM C 1193 and/or where applicable to another

Standard Test Method.
b For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying
adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite
side.
c Monitor programme and report weekly progress to Client

and Engineer.
d Attend and witness testing procedures with specialist

providers/installers.
e Agree test results for presentation to Engineer
f Witness random tests as dictated by Engineer or Statutory

Bodies.
g Advise statutory bodies of the availability of systems for

their witnessing/inspection.
h Advise of required course of action where design

parameters are not achieved.
i Sign off all systems to satisfaction of Engineer and Statutory

Bodies. Issue copies of relevant record documents.
j Chair and minute all commissioning meetings.
6 Produce and document a complete set of final commissioning

and testing record documents.
7 Arrange demonstrations of all systems to the Employer’s staff

satisfaction. Maintain records of all demonstration and staff
attendance.
8 Manage, arrange, procure and attend all necessary factory

acceptance works testing for the Client and their representative.
This will include the following system equipment:
a LV Main Switchgear including devices
b Photovoltaic System

9 Monitor reliability of all plant functions during maintenance

period, and publish reliability results
a Provide all handover documentation and preparation of

Operation and
b Maintenance manuals for the complete electrical services

installation. Undertake all activities in strict accordance
with the criteria set out with the standard specification for
Electrical Engineering services and within the general
preliminaries’ specifications for the Mechanical and
Electrical engineering services.
c In addition to the testing and commissioning of the

individual equipment and systems, include for the
complete cause and effect testing and demonstration of
all interrelated engineering systems.
2.29. TRAINING OF EMPLOYERS STAFF
A. Include for on-site and class training of the Employer’s engineering and
maintenance staff on the complete Electrical Engineering systems
including associated cause and effect on all systems. Submit proposed
training procedures with the tender offer including all necessary
attendance of specialist commissioning engineers and specialist
suppliers.
DDDDD. Provide the services of a skilled technician(s) for a minimum of

two consecutive full months, to start in its proper sequence, and to
thoroughly explain the operation and maintenance of each system
provided to the full satisfaction of Engineer and Employer.
EEEEE. In addition, provide specialized instructions and training by the

respective manufacturers of specialized systems (including but not
exclusive to Fire Alarms and Security) and as may be described under
the appropriate clauses of this specification.
FFFFF. Arrange with the Employer for the most suitable time for instructions to
their operating and maintenance personnel. Keep a record of dates
and durations of each instruction period together with the name(s) of

person(s) to whom the instructions were given. Submit one signed copy
of such record to the Engineer.
2.30. WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES
A. The contractor will be liable for all systems and equipment for a period
of 1 year from TOC (i.e. the Defects and Liability Period, DLP).
GGGGG. In addition to the DLP, the Contractor will provide at least a 2-

year warranty for each installed system and associated plant, or devices
(unless a further extended warrantee is requested in the table below or
a longer warranty requested in the individual specification section). The
warrantee will start on the
HHHHH. 1st day of receiving a Client signed copy of the TOC (Taking Over
Certificate); the warrantee will allow
IIIII. full cover of the system repairs or replacement in its entirety.
JJJJJ. The Contractor will provide maintenance and parts replacement to all
of the following systems for the durations listed.
Component Minimum Minimum Notes

warranty Maintenance
Duration Duration
Lighting Fixtures - Normal 2 years
Lighting Fixtures - LED 5 years
Lighting Control / Dimming 2 years
Emergency Lighting System 2 years
Lightning Protection System 2 years
Surge Protection Devises 2 years
Switches and sockets 2 years
All other equipment not 2 years

listed above
PART 3 | EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL
A. The Electrical installations will be carried out in accordance with the

Local Electricity Authority requirements, IEE Wiring Regulations/IEC
60364.
KKKKK. The Contractor will design, provide, install and co-ordinate all hangers,
inserts, sleeves, supports, brackets and foundation bolts etc. for the
complete Electrical installation in coordination with all other trades. All
metal supports, screws, bolts or hardware will be galvanized and the
Contractor will
LLLLL. apply cold galvanizing compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surface
immediately after cutting.
MMMMM. All supporting work and fixing methods will be appropriate to the
building structure and will be reviewed by the Engineer.
NNNNN. Install all materials, equipment and plant in accordance with the
original manufacturer’s published recommendations.

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS &

CABLES
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables Section 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 |GENERAL ...................................................................................................................1

1.3. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................2
PART 2 |PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................3
2.1. GENERAL (CABLES 600-1000V) ................................................................................3
2.2. PVC OR XLPE/SWA ...................................................................................................3
2.3. FLEXIBLE CORDS & CABLES ......................................................................................4
2.4. HEAT RESISTANT CABLES ...........................................................................................5
2.5. CONTROL CABLES.....................................................................................................5
2.6. GENERAL (PVC CABLES) ..........................................................................................5
2.7. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION...........................................................................................6
2.8. CONDUCTOR SIZE .....................................................................................................6
2.9. CABLE IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................7
2.10. GENERAL (BUSBAR TRUNKING) (NOT APPLICABLE) ................................................8
2.11. STORAGE (NOT APPLICABLE) ...................................................................................8
2.12. BUSBAR TRUNKING (NOT APPLICABLE) ....................................................................8
2.13. BUSBAR CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE) ............................................................9
2.14. BUSBAR TRUNKING SUPPORT (NOT APPLICABLE) ...................................................9
2.15. CONDUCTOR JOINTS (NOT APPLICABLE) .............................................................10
2.16. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (NOT APPLICABLE) ......................................................10
2.17. TAP OFF POSITIONS AND TAP-OFF UNITS (NOT APPLICABLE) ..............................10
2.18. CAST RESIN BUSBAR (NOT APPLICABLE) ................................................................11
PART 3 |EXECUTION .............................................................................................................12
3.1. GENERAL..................................................................................................................12
3.2. ARMOURED CABLES ...............................................................................................13
3.1. FLEXIBLE CORDS & CABLES ....................................................................................15
3.2. RECORD INFORMATION .........................................................................................15
3.3. INSTALLATION (LSF CABLES) ...................................................................................15
3.4. SEGREGATION .........................................................................................................17
3.5. FUNCTIONAL ELV SYSTEM .......................................................................................19
3.7. GENERAL (BUSBAR TRUNKING) (NOT APPLICABLE) ..............................................19

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Electrical Cables and Conductors

best International Standards and Codes of Practice specifically with the
current issue of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS7671) or IEC 60364 and the
requirements of the local supply authority.

the relevant IEC Codes and requirements of the local supply authority.
All cables, accessories and other components supplied, shall comply

with:
1 Latest revisions of the applicable IEC codes and standards.
2 IEC: International Electro technical Commission.
3 NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
C. The electrical systems and system components shall comply with latest
addition of the following key documents (but not limited to):
4 Local Electricity Authority Wiring Regulations
5 Local Municipality
6 Local Civil Defence
7 BS 7671 – Requirements for Electrical Installations
8 BS 6724 – LSZH Armoured Cables
9 BS 8519 – Selection and Installation of fire-resistant power and

control cable
10 systems for life safety and firefighting Applications. Code of

Practice.
11 BS 6004 – Electric Cables PVC insulated

12 IEC 60947 Standards for low-voltage switchgear and control gear
13 IEC 60183 – Guide to the selection of high voltage cables
14 IEC 61084 – Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical

installations
15 IEC 60228 – Conductors of insulated cables
16 IEC 61210 Connecting devices – Flat quick-connect terminations

for electrical
copper conductors – Safety requirements
17 IEC 61238 – Compression and mechanical connectors for power

cables for rated voltages up to 30 kV
18 IEC 60331 – Tests for electrical cables under fire conditions.
19 IEC 60502 – LSZH Armoured Cables
20 IEC 61326 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and

laboratory use – EMC requirements
21 IEC 61355 – Classification and designation of documents for

plants, systems and equipment
22 IEC 61537 Cable management – Cable tray systems and cable

ladder systems
In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

most stringent shall be applied. The Contractor shall provide a schedule
identifying all differences for Client/Engineer’s determination.
D. Comply with local power authority standards for cable sizing and
installation requirements.
1.3. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with all specialist system providers (e.g.
mechanical, fire protection, public health, clean agent suppliers, fire
detection/alarm, BMS, etc.) to understand and include all required
power supply circuits/cables.
B. The Contractor shall maintain a coordinated containment system

including design rules such as EMI separation between power,

emergency lighting, fire alarm, ELV and data/voice cables. Failure to
separate Class 1, 2 and 3 systems could result in additional cost and
delays incurred by Contractor.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL (CABLES 600-1000V)
A. All cables used shall be BASEC approved.
B. All cables to have copper conductors.
C. All cables shall be XLPE and where run internally have an LSF (low smoke
fume) sheath. PVC insulated cables shall not be used without the
approval of the Engineer.
D. XLPE armoured cables shall be used only in the positions indicated on

the attached drawings and or
E. Specification Sections and each cable shall fully comply with the
following requirements.
F. All cables shall be delivered to the site with the makers seals, labels, or
other proof of origin attached.
2.2. PVC OR XLPE/SWA
A. Armoured cables shall comprise stranded copper conductors of equal

section laid up in sector shape, the cores being XLPE insulated, as
specified, further insulated with an overall LSF bedding, single wire
armoured and XLPE/LSF sheathed overall.
B. LSF / XLPE insulated cables shall have fire-retardant low smoke and
halogen-free (LSOH) inner-sheath and out-sheath instead of PVC
compounds. XLPE cables used for high voltage distribution systems shall
incorporate semi-conducting screening tapes and copper tape.
C. XLPE armoured cables rated at 600/1000 Volts shall comply with BS.5467
and those rated at 8700/15000 Volts and 19000/33000 Volts shall comply
with I.E.C. 502-1. Cable sheaths shall be red for HV and black for LV
cables.

D. Where approval by the Engineer, PVC armoured cables shall be rated

at 600/1000 Volts in accordance with BS.6346.
E. Duplicate copies of the test certificates for each length of cable,

together with 300mm of stepped sample cut from the cable length, shall
be forwarded by the manufacturers direct to the Engineer before the
cable is dispatched to the site.
F. Armouring of cables to BS.6346 and BS.5467 shall not be used as a circuit

protective conductor. A separate CPC shall be provided for all circuits.
G. Power circuits for emergency, essential or life safety equipment wired in

XLPE/SWA cables shall include a Mica/glass fire-resistant insulation
covered by an extruded cross-linked insulation complying with BS 7655,
suitable for operating temperature of 90deg.C. It shall meet the
requirements of IEC331 and BS 6387 categories CWZ for fire
resistance/low smoke, BS 4066 Pt 3 Cat.C for flame propagation and Pt.1
for flame retardant.
H. Submit manufacturer catalogue information and technical data for

review by the Engineer.
2.3. FLEXIBLE CORDS & CABLES
A. Flexible cords or cables shall be manufactured in accordance with the

attached drawings and/or specification sections. No cord or cable less
than 24/00.20 or 1.0mm sq. respectively shall be used and selected in
accordance with BS 7671 (514-07).
B. Flexible cords or cables, except those used at the final connection to

lighting fittings, shall be circular 2 or 3 core as required and each
conductor shall be insulated with butyl rubber or EP rubber with cores
twisted together, filled with sheathing compound, textile or the like, so
as to form an assembly of practically circular cross-section with HOFR
sheathing in accordance with BS 6500 Table 9 or BS 6141 Table 8.
C. Flexible cords used for the final connection to all luminaires and other
equipment incorporating heat producing devices shall be 150deg.C
rubber insulated, 85deg.C PVC sheathed flexible cords, circular twin or
3-core as required, in accordance with BS6141 Table 10. Flexible cords

shall be identified as indicated in BS 7671.
2.4. HEAT RESISTANT CABLES
A. Heat resisting cables shall be used as only as agreed with the Engineer
and shall be of the butyl rubber insulated type or approved equal.
B. Butyl rubber insulated cables shall be manufactured to BS.6007 and

rated 450/750 Volts.
C. No cables less than 1.5mm sq. shall be used and the cables shall be
coloured as per section 16050.
2.5. CONTROL CABLES
A. Control cables shall be designed according to BS 6004 and BS 6346 and

shall be rated 600 Volt. B. Control cable shall be as follows: -
23 Conductors : Quantity and size shown on drawing (all copper)
24 Identification : Colour coded
25 Insulation : LSF
26 Armour : Steel
27 Jacket : Flame retardant LSF
B. Provide control cables as shown on drawings and as specified.
C. Control cable shall be installed in cable trunking, unless otherwise

shown.
D. Terminate control cables in associated equipment with suitable

connectors.
2.6. GENERAL (PVC CABLES)
A. All conductors shall be copper with PVC outer sheath.
B. PVC cables shall be enclosed in galvanized conduit, trunking and within

short lengths of flexible conduit for final connections to the various items
of equipment.
C. PVC cables shall be manufactured in accordance with the

requirements of BS 6004 and be rated at 300/500 Volts. Cables having
insulation of butyl or silicon rubber (to BS 6007), or other heat resistant

cables to an equivalent appropriate BS shall be used in the positions and

areas indicated.
D. A minimum of 1.5mm sq. conductor size shall be utilized, all cables shall
be multi-stranded. All BS.6360 Class 2, 2.5mm sq. cables shall be of the
7/0.67 stranded type.
E. Cables shall be coloured throughout their whole length in accordance

with the IEE Regulations, local authority requirements and as detailed in
this specification.
F. All cables shall be delivered to site with each coil having its seal intact
and bearing the name of the manufacturer, classification, size,
description of cable, length and grade.
G. Cables shall not pass through luminaires unless of the heat resisting type.
2.7. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. All cables entering distribution boards or terminal outlets such as socket

outlets, luminaires, etc., shall be complete with an alpha/numeric
identification sleeve to denote the phase, circuit reference and/or
terminal number to which it is connected.
B. Circuit wiring from different distribution boards shall not be installed

within the same trunking or conduit system. Where this is approved by
the Engineer, cables shall be distinguished by separating the cables with
Velcro ties at intervals of 2.0m together with an approved means of
identification adjacent to each taping that clearly denotes the circuit
type and reference.
2.8. CONDUCTOR SIZE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, final sub-circuit wiring (single core in

conduit/trunking) throughout the works shall be sized as follows: -

Service MCB Size Conductor Size (mm. sq.)

Phase/Neutral/Earth
28 Lighting Circuit Up to 1000 Watts 16A 2.5
29 Lighting Circuit above 1000 Watts 20A 4.0
30 Socket Outlets Conduits
(ring circuits)
- Steel
- Plastic 20A 4.0
31 Radial Circuits 4.0
- SP&N up to 16A 2.5
up to 20A 4.0
up to 25A 6.0
up to 32A 10.0
32 Smaller
- TP&N conductor
up tosizes using XLPE insulated
16A cables cannot
4.0 be
considered for plastic conduit due to the maximum operating
up to 20A 6.0
temperature of 70 deg C.
up to 25A 10.0
B. Where home runs are greater than 25m to the distribution board phase
conductor sizes up tobe increased by one32A
shall size. 16.0
C. To minimize voltage-drop and to ensure current carrying capacity, the

maximum permissible cable length between the transformer and the 12-
volt lamp shall not be greater than: -
CONDUCTOR CROSS - SECTION (mm sq.)
LAMP LOAD 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0

20W 6.4m 10.5m - - -
50W 2.6m 4.2m 6.5 10.3m -
75W 1.7m 2.8m m
4.4 6.9 11.4m
2.9. CABLE 100
IDENTIFICATION
1.3m 2.1m m
3.3 m
5.1 8.6
A. W
The identification m
of individual circuit conductors shallmbe as defined
m in
Section 16050.
2.10. GENERAL (BUSBAR TRUNKING) (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Supply, install, test and commission the busbar trunking system including
flanges, elbows, tap -off boxes, supports etc., of the type and size as
indicated on the drawings and in locations. All busbar and associated
installation shall be in accordance with the following requirements.
B. The busbar shall carry its rated current without exceeding the
temperature rise of 55ºC over an ambient of 50ºC at 90% relative
humidity in any plane without de-rating and without effecting the local
power supply requirements.
2.11. STORAGE (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Store bus duct at site continuously in ventilated, dry locations. Busbars or

bus duct shall be rejected if they have been affected by moisture or
condensation, roughly handled, or marked at joints or connection
points, or plating is damaged in any way. Do not install bus duct until the
area of the building is enclosed and dry.
2.12. BUSBAR TRUNKING (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. The busbars shall be totally enclosed in a non-ventilated, low

impedance sandwich design. The busbar trunking shall be sandwiched
throughout its entire length, busbar trunking flared at tap -points are not
acceptable.
B. The enclosure shall comprise a non-magnetic extruded aluminium

housing with unpainted natural finish and fully fault rated and provide
additional protection by ASTA certified integral earthing (PE protective
conductor).
C. Each piece of busbar trunking shall be labelled E, L1, L2, L3, N at both
ends to identify conductor phasing.
D. Minimum enclosure protection shall be IP42 (for vertical runs) as defined

in BSEN 60529 and shall be ASTA certified in both horizontal and vertical
positions.
E. Copies of ASTA certificates for enclosure PE short-circuit; IP ratings,

dielectric temperature rise rating shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval.
F. All horizontal runs of the busbar trunking shall be designed for IP65
operation and IP42 for the vertical runs within risers.
G. Ratings 800A to 2500A
33 The busbar trunking shall be designed and constructed for use on

a 400V, three phase, four wire, 50HZ system. The minimum rated
insulation voltage shall be 600V. Each rating of busbar trunking
shall be ASTA type tested and certified for short circuit ratings for
one second covering phase, neutral, earth conductor and the
housing as an additional protective conductor.
34 Copies of ASTA test certificates shall be provided to the Engineer

for each rating for review.
35 The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the busbar trunking

shall be as follows:
2.13. BUSBAR CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. The phase and neutral busbar conductors shall be of rectangular

section made of hard drawn high conductivity copper of 99.9% purity to
BSEN13601:2002, Cu-ETP, CW004A. A Declaration of Conformity from the
copper supplier must be submitted to the Engineer.
B. The neutral conductor shall be full rated and be of the same material
and dimension as the phase busbars.
C. The earth conductor shall be rated at 100% of the phase busbars.
D. All busbar conductors shall be totally enclosed in Class B130ºC insulating

polyester film material.
2.14. BUSBAR TRUNKING SUPPORT (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. The busbar trunking shall be properly aligned, and securely fixed, not
exceeding 1.5m (or as recommended by the manufacturer) centers
with support adequate to take the weight of the busbar by means of
galvanized fixing brackets; comprising hanger clamp, fixing channel
and damping screw, supplied by the busbar trunking manufacturer.
Additional supports shall be supplied where required and where
recommended by the trunking manufacturer.
B. In vertical runs, busbars shall be designed to allow each section of

trunking to be removed on one floor only without the need to dismantle
the trunking on other floors.
2.15. CONDUCTOR JOINTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Joining of the busbar lengths shall be by means of a quick make non-

reversible joint pack comprising a double headed, torque indicating
single joint bolt, including a high visibility disc for visual indication of
unmade joints. For ease of jointing and to minimize installation time, joints
up to 2000A shall have a single torque bolt only. Above 2000A two
torque bolts per joint shall be used.
B. Joints shall be of a safe asymmetrical design to ensure correct phasing

when jointing two lengths.
C. It shall be possible to torque the joint using a standard long handle

wrench with a 19mm socket.
D. The joints shall accommodate 15mm of thermal expansion of

conductors and housing without requiring additional expansion joints,
except at building expansions.
2.16. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. A declaration of fire resistance for 240 minutes minimum to ISO 834, BS

476, DIN 4102 Part 2 shall be provided by the busbar trunking
manufacturers.
B. Fire rated materials shall be fitted by the Contractor to fill openings

where busbar trunking passes through floors or walls with floor/wall
flanges supplied by the busbar trunking manufacturer.
2.17. TAP OFF POSITIONS AND TAP-OFF UNITS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Busbar trunking shall have tap-off positions where shown on the

drawings. As a minimum provide 2 tap-off positions per floor per busbar
riser.
B. Each tap off position shall be provided with automatic safety shutters to
shield the live busbars where the position is not occupied with a tap off
unit.
C. Tap-off positions shall be non-flared and suitable for tap-off units to be

plugged on to the busbars.
D. Shutters shall be activated by the insertion of the tap-off units and shall
only operate if the boxes are the correct way round.
E. The plug-in contact shall self-align with the busbars and plug-in openings
shall provide personal protection and safety of IP 2X when in the open
position and IP42 in the closed position in accordance with BS EN 60529.
F. Within risers, plug-in tap-off positions shall be provided with a maximum

distance of one plug-in opening for each 1000mm.
G. Tap-off boxes shall be constructed of zinc plated sheet steel and shall
be complete with hinged lids with an ASTA certified protective standard
of IP42.
H. he tap-off boxes shall have circuit protective devices as applicable and

shown on the drawings with mechanical interlocks to prevent tap box
removal unless the mechanism is in the off position.
I. Where tap-off boxes are inserted into live busbar trunking, they shall be
designed and constructed so that the current carrying metal parts are
not exposed during the insertion and removal of the boxes.
J. The tap-off box shall remain earthed during removal, until all live
connections are disabled. The tap - off box shall ensure that the box can
only be inserted to give correct polarity.
K. All operational handles shall be padlockable.
L. Tap-off boxes up to 630A shall be of the plug-on type for ease of

installation and removal above this rating they must be of the bolt-on
type.
M. The tap-off units shall be MCCB current limiting type. The MCCBs shall
compliment those used elsewhere (for the distribution panels) in order
to allow co-ordination and future addition of shunt trip/motor operation
devices.
2.18. CAST RESIN BUSBAR (NOT APPLICABLE)

A. Cast resin bus bar shall be utilized to achieve the fire rating and IP65
requirements where noted on the drawings and called for in the
specification (see section 16050).
B. Generally, the cast resin busbars shall be as outlined above.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. Spacing of Cables
36 Unless otherwise stated cables shall have a minimum clearance

between cables/or cable groups for single core cables as follows:
-
Multi-core SWA or MICS 1d Rack

Ladder 2d Tray
Cable
Where d = horizontal clearance between cables equal to largest cable

Single core cables 1d 2d
37 diameter.
Multiple banking of cables is not permitted unless approved. (A
(Trefoil)
minimum clearance of 4d is required between cables to ensure
no de-rating applies).
B. All single core cables shall be terminated to minimize eddy currents i.e.
onto a substantial non-ferrous plate.
C. All cables shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer

recommendations and to comply with the IEE Regulations.
D. Each run of cable shall be manufactured in one length. No through joints

shall be allowed on any new cables unless authorized by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall include for phase identification of cable
conductors from the main switchboard. Terminals at each end of the
feeders shall be correspondingly marked.
E. The Contractor shall include for measuring and cutting the exact lengths
required for the run. There shall be no additional cost to the Client for
waste cable lengths.
F. PVC or LSF served cables shall not be installed in direct contact with any

form of polystyrene.
G. Where PVC or XLPE armoured cables are to be installed together they

shall be fixed to a common cable tray, the cables being secured to the
cable tray by means of suitable cleats, or other approved means.
3.2. ARMOURED CABLES
A. In no case shall the radius of any armoured cable bend be lower than
eight times the overall diameter of cable for PVC armoured cable and
twelve times the diameter for XLPE armoured cables.
B. The cables shall be terminated in approved type compression glands to

BS6121 complete with shroud and propriety earthing plate/tag, from
which an earth bond shall be made to the panel earth bar.
C. Resin only shall be used as a flux. Cable jointing kits shall accord with
BS.6910: Part 1. Compound shall be to BS.1858 generally Class 2 unless
otherwise stated. The design, control of work and actual jointing
procedures shall accord with BS.6910: Part 2 the Code of Practice for on
-site installation for cable systems up to 1000A armoured cables shall be
rated at 600/1000 Volts in accordance with BS.6346 Volts.
D. Except where the gland is screwed into a screwed entry of a Class 1

enclosure, allow for the provision of a gland earth tag washer (or earth
ring) together with brass bolt, nuts and washers irrespective of whether
the enclosure is metallic or non-metallic.
E. Where an enclosure is non-metallic and a protective conductor is

required for the armouring (e.g. to continue the protective conductor
through the enclosure), allow for the earth tag an d the protective
conductor lug to be clamped between two locknuts within the
enclosure, so obviating the risk of the degradation of the joint by
creepage of the non-metallic enclosure material.
F. Spacing of cable supports shall be within the maximum distances

specified in BS.7671 Wiring Regulations, according to the cable
diameter, with a maximum spacing of 600mm horizontally and 750mm
vertically for cables having an overall diameter exceeding 40mm.
Cleats shall be of the correct size type and spacing to suit the particular

cable. Cleats shall be plastic or silicon aluminium type, cable tie wraps
shall not be permitted.
G. Where cables pass through non-fire rated floors or through walls, they
shall be protected by a short length of heavy gauge pipe bushed with
hardwood or lead at each end. When rising through a floor the
protecting barrel shall project to a height of approximately 1.20m.
H. Where PVC or XLPE armoured cables are to be laid direct in the ground,
they shall be buried at a depth of not less than 900mm below ground
level for 600/1000 Volt grade cables and a minimum depth of 900mm
for 11kV/33kV cables. The bottom of the trench shall be covered with a
75mm minimum layer of sand before the cable is laid and a further
covering a 90mm depth of sand shall be provided over the cable and
the whole identified by means of heavy gauge polyethylene strip with
printed warning of cable below. The tape shall be coloured YELLOW for
an electric cable and GREEN for a telephone service connection and
laid 225mm below finished ground level.
I. Armoured cables scheduled to cross roads, paths, car parks, structural

concrete or pavements, exceeding 1.80m wide, shall be installed in
adequate cross-sectional area earthenware ducts or approved and
equal type. Cables to be installed adjacent to pavements shall be
located below the outer edge of the pavement, with cable protection
covers or tape.
J. Where more than one cable is to be installed in a common trench or

route, they shall be spaced at the following minimum dimensions: -
HV LV GAS & HOT COMMS

WATER SERVICES
HV LV 150mm 300mm 600mm 600mm 800mm

Communicat
300mm 80mm 600mm 300mm 800mm
ions
600mm 300mm 600mm 50mm 800mm
K. & Alarms
Rollers shall be used during the installation of underground cables to
prevent them being pulled through the base of the trench.

L. No cable crossing shall be permitted except at branches off the main

trench. Where the cables enter draw-in points adequate slack cable
shall be left. All cables shall be kept clear of other service pipes and
cables by not less than 50mm, preferably below hot water pipes. Where
it is found necessary to cross service pipes and cables and the required
clearance cannot be obtained, hardwood blocks shall be inserted
between and securely fixed in position.
M. Where cables enter buildings, they shall pass through buried ducts laid
to fall. The ducts shall be complete with suitable puddle flanges and
after the installation of the cables the Contractor shall include for the
ducts to be plugged to ensure that a complete watertight seal is
provided around and within the duct.
3.1. FLEXIBLE CORDS & CABLES
A. Where luminaires are suspended from flexible cords the maximum

weight supported must not exceed the value indicated in BS 7671 (522-
08-05).
3.2. RECORD INFORMATION
A. Identify the type and route of all main and sub-main cables routes on
the as-installed Record
B. Drawings. This shall include all changes in direction and entry / exit from
risers.
C. Include manufacturers published data of all cables within the O&M

Manual.
3.3. INSTALLATION (LSF CABLES)
A. Cables shall be loomed into separate circuits by means of purpose

made Velcro bands at 2m intervals and laid into trunking after removal
of all lids.
B. Cables shall be laid into the trunking and not drawn into trunking except
where it passes through the structure.
C. Except where other types of enclosures are specifically referred to in this

Specification, all LSF cables shall be enclosed in conduit and trunking

systems.
D. Lighting, power and low voltage socket outlets, together with other
auxiliary services shall be enclosed in separate conduits and no wiring
associated with one service shall be installed in any conduit box or
enclosure containing wires associated with a different service, unless the
box or enclosure etc. as supplied by the manufacturer, is complete with
a segregation fillet, in accordance with the I.E.E. Regulations.
E. The wiring of the installation shall be carried out on the loop-in system.
Switch feed wires for lighting circuits shall be looped at the switch points
and common or neutral wires and switch wires at lighting points.
F. Outlets other than lighting points which are on the same circuit shall loop
from outlets. No other joints shall be allowed. Junction boxes, three plate
ceiling roses and the like shall not be used unless otherwise stated or
agreed in writing with the Engineer.
G. Connections between flexible cords and cables shall be made by

means of an approved porcelain or nylon connector block.
H. Any cables which fail to pass the specified tests during installation, at
completion of the work and/or completion of defects liability period
shall be replaced. No extra charges shall be levied for this work.
I. At termination points such as luminaires, switch or socket outlets etc.,

sufficient length shall be left on cable ends to ensure that there is no
tension on the connections. The mid -point wiring connection of 13-amp
ring mains shall be noted on the as fitted drawings.
J. When preparing cable ends, ensure that none of the conductor strands
are damaged and the strands are twisted together with pliers to ensure
a neat and firm connection.
K. The conductor insulation shall be removed for a minimum length to

facilitate connection, and no excess of exposed conductor shall be left.
L. Where LSF cables are installed vertically, in either trunking or conduit,

adequate support for the cables, shall be provided so that they may be
clamped to relieve the stress, due to the cable weight. Allow circuit
cables to be secured within the trunking at a space not exceeding 2.0m
and at terminal ends.
M. No form of earth concentric wiring shall be allowed and the phase and
neutral conductors shall be effectively isolated from items of switchgear
and enclosures which are at earth potential. Connections between the
neutral and earth conductors shall be made only at transformer or main
L.V. switchboards as indicated on the attached drawings and/or
Specification Sections.
N. Phase and neutral conductors at all times shall be installed in continuous

earthed metal enclosures in the form of conduit, trunking, cable sheaths
and armouring, metal clad switchgear etc., unless otherwise indicated.
O. Cable terminations to equipment shall be made one of the following

methods: -
38 Sweated lugs of the appropriate sizes for the cable used.
39 Compression type lugs.
40 Pinch type screw terminations of the type that do not spread the
conductors.
41 Clamp type conductors.
P. In addition, the cable conductors shall be doubled back on themselves

for all single connections of conductors size up to and including 2.5mm
sq.
Q. Where an item of switchgear has more than one point of supply e.g.
contains a relay having a control circuit fed from another distribution
board, a durable warning notice shall be provided to warn of the need
to isolate all the supplies to the switchgear before access is gained to
live parts. The notice shall identify the location of the isolation devices
for each of the supplies into the switchgear and shall be affixed in such
a position that it can easily be seen before access is gained to live parts.
3.4. SEGREGATION
A. Where an installation comprises of circuits for telecommunication, fire

alarms or emergency lighting systems as well as circuits operating at low
voltage and connected to a mains supply system; precautions must be

taken to prevent electrical contact (and for fire alarm circuits and
emergency lighting physical contact) between the cables of the various
types of circuits.
B. Segregation must be achieved as indicated in BS.7671 and in

accordance with local authority requirements.
C. In addition to the above specific requirements and manufacturers

recommendations must be obtained in respect to telecommunications
cables which may require additional shielding for segregation. In the
case of Telephone cables, the relevant authority or supplier must be
contacted.
D. For guidance generally, arrangements for enclosing cables to the

above regulations are detailed below:
42 Category 1 - A circuit operating at low voltage and supplied

directly from a mains supply system.
43 Category 2 - Telecommunications circuits e.g. radio, telephone,

sound, intruder alarm, bell and call and data transmission circuit.
44 Category 3 - Fire alarm and emergency lighting.
45 Method A- All three categories installed in trunking must be

individual segregated by fire resistant partitions between each
category.
46 Method B - Independent conduit system for each category.
47 Method C - All three categories installed in the same enclosure,

provided that category 3 circuits are mineral insulated and
category 2 are insulated to same standard as category 1.
48 Method D - Category 3 circuits separately enclosed
49 Category 2 insulated to same standard as
E. When category 1 and 2 circuits terminate at boxes for the connections

of accessories or controls, the two categories of circuit must be
partitioned by means of rigidly fixed screen or barriers.
F. In all cases the relevant sections of the specific Specification shall

supersede the above clauses.
G. Notwithstanding the above, LV and ELV cables shall not be permitted

to run in the same enclosure or cores of the same multi-core cable.
3.5. FUNCTIONAL ELV SYSTEM
A. Unless otherwise stated all ELV systems provided under this Contract shall
conform to the requirements of BS.7671 for Functional ELV systems.
B. Where small transformers complying with BS.3535, Class II construction

(BS.2754) providing supplies to control and bell circuits are fitted within
the distribution assembly, SELV circuit conductors shall be: -
50 Physically separated from those of any other system or
51 Insulated for the highest voltage present (in the enclosure) or
52 Comprise non-metallic sheathed cables or
53 Be separated for higher voltage systems by an earthed metallic

screen or sheath or
54 Contained in multi-core cable or other grouping of conductors,

insulated for the highest voltage present.
C. Cable commonly known as bell wire is not acceptable for connecting

the SELV transformer located within the distribution assembly to other
SELV equipment at least within the switchgear enclosure without
additional protection.
D. In all cases where a transformer or other item of auxiliary equipment is

mounted on the DIN rail, adequate protection against over current shall
be provided for the circuit by feeding the auxiliary equipment from a
separate way of the distribution board.
A. Provide details of the LSF cables within the O&M manual.
3.7. GENERAL (BUSBAR TRUNKING) (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Installation manuals detailing handling, storage, installation,

energization, maintenance and joint assembly must be provided by the
manufacturer. The Contractor shall ensure that the busbar trunking is

stored on site in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation

manual, in a clean and dry environment.
B. Install the busbar system as specified and shown on the drawings and
as recommended by the approved manufacturer.
C. Use a torque wrench to ensure uniform tension on bus duct joints. After
completion of installation, and before system is accepted by Engineer,
re-check each bolted joint with a torque wrench in an approved
manner. Torque adjustment shall be as recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Cover ventilated busbar systems with a weatherproof heavy-duty

plastic envelope as soon as it has been installed. Do not remove this
cover until the building is clean and dry and the system is ready to be
tested and energize.
E. Bus duct layout throughout has been based on dimensions of a generic

bus duct. The Contractor shall include for ensuring that the bus duct
selected can be installed in locations indicated without any increase in
contract price and without any increase to room size or encroachment
of other areas.
F. Ensure that adequate spatial provision and/or allowance is made for

pouring resin compound when making joints on cast resin busbar.
G. Ensure the rising busbars, cable tray, distribution board, tap off
arrangement and other services are coordinated in the riser spaces prior
to installation.
H. Provide protective sleeves around bus ducts as they pass through walls
and floors prior to making good.
I. Check penetrations through wall, floors and slabs are checked to ensure
the busbars can be installed as intended.

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 |GENERAL ..................................................................................................................1

1.3. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................1
1.4. WORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................2
1.6. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................2
PART 2 |PRODUCTS ...............................................................................................................3
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................3
PART 3 |EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4
1.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................4
1.2. EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING OF INTAKE SYSTEMS......................................................4
1.3. SUPPLEMENTARY BONDING .....................................................................................5
1.4. OTHER ITEMS TO BE BONDED/EARTHED UNDER THE CONTRACT ..........................6
1.5. SUB-STATION EARTHING ............................................................................................6
1.6. ELV ROOM .................................................................................................................8

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Grounding and Bonding
A. All electrical installations shall be carried out and tested in accordance

with the best International Standards and Codes of Practice specifically
with the current issue of the IEC 60364 and the requirements of the local
supply authority.
B. Comply with the following standards:
55 Local Electricity Wiring Regulations
56 BS 7430 - Code of Practice for Earthing
57 IEC 60364-5-548 - Code of Practice for Earthing
C. In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

1.3. COORDINATION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall attend site and liaise with other trade
package contractors to coordinate the earthing and bonding
requirements of the substructure and structure packages. The
Contractor will take responsibility for the electrodes and substructure
connections and extend the system as shown on the drawings.
B. Allow for complete coordination with all trades and services to ensure
earthing and bonding of the complete installation is in compliance with
the above referenced standards.
C. Coordinate with the local supply authority for the provision and
installation of earthing electrode and inspection pits in accordance with
their requirements for sub-stations, LV switch rooms, lightning protection
and general electrical services installations.

D. Coordinate timely provision of earth pits, waterproofing and drilling of

earth bore holes with the Contractor.
E. Coordinate the provision of dedicated reinforcing bars within structural

columns and piles for use as bonding conductors where specified or
indicated on the drawings. Ensure that all required connections and
continuity is achieved to provide the earth path resistances identified by
the Local Supply Authorities.
1.4. WORK INCLUDED
A. This section supplements the main contract conditions and forms part of
every section of Division 26
B. Electrical trade and shall be read in conjunction with all sections of the
specification.
C. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to supply

and install the earthing and bonding systems as indicated on the
drawings and specified in these specifications, to provide a complete
and operational installation.
A. All electrical installations shall be installed, tested and commissioned in

accordance with the best International Standards and Codes of
Practice specifically with the current issue of the IEE Regulations (BS 7671)
and the requirements of the local supply authority.
B. Comply with the British Standard BS 7430 Code of Practice for Earthing
C. Comply with the British Standard 6651 Code of Practice for Protection of
Structures against Lightning
1.6. COORDINATION
A. Allow for complete coordination with all trades and services to ensure
B. Coordinate with the local supply authority for the provision and
installation of earthing electrode and inspection pits in accordance with
their requirements for sub-stations, LV switch rooms, lightning protection
and general electrical services installations.
C. Coordinate timely provision of earth pits and drilling of earth bore holes
with the Contractor.
D. Coordinate the provision of dedicated reinforcing bars within structural

columns and piles for use as bonding conductors where specified or
indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. The Contract shall include for the supply and installation, inspection and
testing of all components necessary as appropriate to provide an
effective earthing system fully complying with BS.7430 and BS.7671 (in
particular parts 4 and 7) for the following:
58 Equip potential bonding to all intake services within each area.
59 Supplementary bonding within internal areas and plant areas

including piped services.
60 Any earthing necessary to comply with the supply authorities’

requirements.
61 Bond to the lightning protection system.
62 Substation earthing to include dedicated earth pits and

conductors to substation earth bars, for use by the local supply
authority. The earth pits and cabling for transformers and HV
switchgear will be supplied and installed by the Local Authority.
63 Clean and dirty earthing system as indicated on the drawings or

in the specification.
64 Generator system earthing. (NOT APPLICABLE)
65 Computer equipment room earthing.
B. The electrical system shall follow the “TT” system of earthing, i.e., having
separate neutral and earthing conductors throughout.
C. Pay special attention to the earthing requirements associated with

sauna, steam rooms and pool areas. Bond all conductive parts together

and to earth. (NOT APPLICABLE)
D. All cables and earth bars shall be copper.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
1.1. GENERAL
A. It shall be noted that wherever conductors pass through walls or floors

etc., they shall do so via an insulated sleeve provided and installed
under this Contract.
B. It shall also be noted that all trunking or trays containing ELV,

communication or data/CCMS signals shall be electrically continuous
and bonded at one single point (at the start of the run). Earthing
arrangements shall not form networks or loops along the trunking or tray
such that induced circulating currents can flow.
C. All cable glands shall be complete with a proprietary earthing tag from
which a bond shall be extended to the panel earth bar.
D. The earthing system shall be installed in accordance with all sections of

the specification and as indicated on the drawings.
E. Typical details are indicated on the typical earthing drawing.
F. Installation to comply with requirements of specification and local

supply authority.
G. Provide dedicated CPC (Circuit Protective Conductor) for every main,

sub-main and final circuit conductor
H. All conductors to be banded/labeled indicating which items they serve.
1.2. EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING OF INTAKE SYSTEMS
A. An equipotential bond shall emanate from each main LV earth bar to

bond incoming services,
B. structure and main building services engineering systems (i.e. whole

project services) etc. and bonded at each floor level or area onto the
distribution center for that floor or area where these distribute through
the building.
C. The equipotential bonds to building services engineering systems shall

emanate from the substation or main LV intake panel, i.e. ladder rack,
trunking, tray, water main, fire/sprinkler main, gas and oil pipework,
steam etc.
D. Where services emanate from plant areas i.e. ductwork, HWS, DHS,
chilled water, etc., the equipotential bond shall be made to the earth
bar of the switchgear or motor control panel serving that area. The
cable shall terminate in a tag, in turn clamped to the metallic ductwork
or pipework.
E. If not indicated on the drawing, conductor sizes shall be a minimum of

25mm sq. for equipotential bond and 6mm sq. for supplementary bonds.
Equipotential and Supplementary bonds shall also be provided in any
generator area.
F. The main equipotential bonding conductors shall be LSF sheathed with

copper conductors, sheathing coloured green and yellow. The bonding
connection to the mechanical services being with sweated or crimped
lugs onto a purpose made connection point on ductwork or the like or
purpose made copper clamp to pipework. Main equipotential bonding
conductors shall conform to the sizing requirements of the Local
Electricity Authority and IEC 60364.
1.3. SUPPLEMENTARY BONDING
A. This Contract shall include for the installation of all supplementary

bonding in wet areas, etc. necessary to comply with Local Electricity
Authority Regulations and IEC 60364.
B. All metal sinks, work surfaces (in kitchens etc.), tanks, exposed pipework,
etc., shall be supplementary bonded under this Contract to the earth
terminal of an adjacent socket outlet or accessory on a power circuit
using green/yellow LSF insulated cable in accordance with the Local
Electricity Authority Regulations and IEC 60364. The earth wire shall be
installed in flush conduit terminating at low level with 50.8mm fixing
center conduit box fitted with a bushed dome lid. The supply and
installation of all necessary bonding terminals to the sinks, tanks, etc.,
shall be included in this Contract.

1.4. OTHER ITEMS TO BE BONDED/EARTHED UNDER THE CONTRACT
A. Other Items to be included in the Contract as applicable, unless

otherwise stated.
B. The Contractor shall include for the testing for earth continuity of all
extraneous conductive parts where work has been undertaken under
this Contract.
C. The Contractor shall include for all continuity links between services run
on tray and conduits to the final outlet points.
D. The Contractor shall include for bonding all equipment under this
Contract.
E. The Contractor shall include for bonding the LV intake earth bar to the
lightning protection installation.
F. The Contractor shall include for bonding the architectural supports and
structures including metal façade details, metal work on roof, metal
ceilings, floors, etc.
G. Any Functional Earths provided shall be coloured to IEC 60364-5-548 and

sized in accordance with their intended application.
1.5. SUB-STATION EARTHING
A. HV and Transformer Neutral earthing will be provided by the local

authority.
B. The arrangement and location of the earthing components within this

scope of works is indicated on the design drawings but in general each
LV Room shall be complete with an earth bar which shall be connected
to the site dedicated electrodes by means of single core XLPE cables
complete with green/yellow coloured LS0H sheath and engraved or
stamped label inscribed SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT
REMOVE.
C. The site earth cable shall be secured to the main system earth bar by a
threaded bolt and double nut arrangement, which requires a tool to
disconnect it.
D. Unless otherwise stated, LV Room earth bars shall be in the form of 50mm
x 6mm thick copper mounted on adequate porcelain insulators and raw

bolts. All connections shall be spaced a minimum center of 75mm and
each earth bar shall have 50% spare length for the connection of future
conductors.
E. Connections to the earth bars shall be made by means of compression

or soldered cable lugs complete with 2-hole fixings, and 2 x 10mm
cadmium plated set screws and nuts, spring washers and brass washers.
F. Ferrell type labels shall be provided on each earth conductor

connection to indicate size and designation.
G. Separate earth conductors shall be taken from the earth bars to the
various metal clad equipment frames, including switchboards operating
at a voltage in excess of low voltage, LV switchboards, standby diesel
generators, power factor correction equipment, etc. The conductors
shall be either bare copper strip or stranded insulated cable as detailed
on the attached drawings and/or specification section.
H. The Contractor shall also bond all metallic louvres, gates etc. of the
transformer bay/compound and include any equipotential bonds to
water and mechanical services, all in accordance with the local supply
authority requirements.
I. Unless otherwise stated, all earthing conductors shall be stranded

insulated cable as detailed on the attached drawings and/or
J. Copper rods shall be provided for each earth electrode which shall be
capped by a suitable concrete earth pit complete with access cover.
Heavy duty electrode pit covers, suitable for withstanding vehicular
traffic, shall be provided for pits on roadway areas.
K. Where the earth electrode conductors leave each building, they shall
do so via a suitable test link and be protected by either cable tiles laid
on a bed of sifted sand surrounding the conductors or installed in buried
lengths of high-density PVC ducts.
L. Concrete earth pits shall be handed over to the Contractor for

installation in the ground slabs.

M. No joints shall be allowed in any stranded cable run, except at the main
earth bar or terminal positions, and all joints in strip conductors shall be
kept to a minimum.
N. Where joints are necessary in strip conductors, each shall be soldered

and riveted in order to ensure an electrically and mechanically
continuous joint.
O. Earth conductors installed outside the buildings shall be in the form of

copper tapes or cables in accordance with the attached drawings
and/or Specification Sections and be adequately protected against
corrosion.
P. Solid copper strip or cable earth continuity conductors installed on the

surface of walls shall be fixed by means of brass or copper two hole fixing
saddles. All strip of stranded cable coloured conductors shall be
complete with green/yellow PVC sheath unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Where earth electrodes pass through, or are set into structural concrete
rafts, the hole so formed shall be adequately sealed to prevent the
ingress of moisture.
R. A satisfactory earthing system is one where the resistance to earth of the

earthing network is less than 1 ohm.
S. Bentonite may be added to pits in order reduce earth resistance, at the

discretion of the Engineer.
T. Contractor to allow drilling earth pits to a depth of 5m below the water

table. Where the earth pits are provided within the building, the
Contractor shall ensure that pits are drilled at a timely stage (i.e.
access/headroom available for drilling rig).
U. Any earth pits provided internally shall have a vapour seal. All earth pits
that penetrate the lowest structural slab shall be provided with
waterproof seal and installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommended guidelines.
1.6. ELV ROOM
A. Provide dedicated earth bar mounted on insulated stand-offs within the

IT/ELV rooms.
B. Connect all metal work (ceiling grid, raised floor, ducting, cable tray
and trunking, etc.) in the ELV room to the earth bar.
C. Connect ELV room earth bar to an external earth mat or group of

electrodes such that the reading of the external grounding
arrangement is less than 1ohm.

SECTION 26 05 29 – HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 - 0

SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................1
1.3. SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................1
1.4. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................1
1.6. GENERAL....................................................................................................................2
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................2
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................2
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................3
3.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................3
3.2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................3
3.3. APPLICATION .............................................................................................................3
3.4. SUPPORT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................3
3.5. CONCRETE BASES .....................................................................................................4
3.6. PAINTING ...................................................................................................................5

SECTION 260529 – HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
B. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
C. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating

weight of supported equipment and connected systems and
components.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist

maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum
structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
66 Steel slotted support systems.
67 Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include

calculations for the following:
68 Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
69 Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for

components.
70 Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for

components.
71 Equipment supports.
1.4. COORDINATION
A. Design and coordinate size and location of all required concrete bases
with equipment
B. manufacturers. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork
C. requirements should be in accordance with the structural engineer’s

requirements.

best International Standards and Codes of Practice and the
requirements of the Local Electricity Authority.

relevant International Codes and requirements of the local supply
authority.

identifying all differences for Client/Engineer’s
D. determination.
1.6. GENERAL
A. Provide cast-in fixtures within concrete walls for all main electrical and
communications risers.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. Provide proprietary galvanized channel for casting into the structure to

support electrical equipment and cable containment systems. Supports
shall be as Unistrut or equal and approved.
B. The support arrangement shall be provided on all walls where

equipment is to be provided and allow for future expansion.
C. Materials shall be selected to suit the load to be carried, which shall be

agreed with the Engineer, who shall require detailed calculations of size
and weight capacity of the insert.

PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. Provide inserts to achieve a flexible mounting arrangement to suit the

initial and future needs. Horizontal spacing between inserts to be as per
manufacturers’ recommendations. For Tender allow a maximum
spacing of 1000mm.
B. Inserts to include all tangs etc., needed to achieve the required strength
and be foam filled to ensure they remain free of grout.
3.2. INSTALLATION
A. Where specific fasteners are not specified or indicated for securing items
to in-place construction, provide appropriate type, size, and number of
fasteners for a secure, rigid installation.
B. Install anchoring devices and other fasteners in accordance with

manufacturer’s printed instructions.
C. Make attachments to structural steel wherever possible.
3.3. APPLICATION
A. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway:
Space supports as required by IEC 60364 and as recommended by the
manufacturer. Provide calculations to verify considerations.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated

with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be
increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified
design load limits.
C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts

may be used for 38-mm and smaller raceways serving branch circuits
and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for
fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.4. SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future

static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load
used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 90 kg.
B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and

Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to
building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise
indicated by code:
72 To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
73 To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
74 To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units

and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
75 To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
76 To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS

D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS
Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring-
tension clamps].
77 To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
78 Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building

Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panel boards, disconnect switches,
control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
C. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths

that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.5. CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 100
mm larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be
a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment

manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and

directions furnished with items to be embedded.
D. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to

supported equipment.
E. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6. PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use
same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas and apply galvanizing - repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 26 05 33 – CABLE TRUNKING
Cable Trunking Section 26 05 33 - 0

SECTION 26 05 33
CABLE TRUNKING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................2
1.2. WORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................2
1.4. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................2
1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................3
1.6. DEDICATED TRUNKING SYSTEMS ..............................................................................3
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................3
2.1. STEEL CABLE TRUNKING ............................................................................................3
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................5
3.1. CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION..............................................................................5
3.2. SHEET STEEL CABLE TRUNKING ..................................................................................6
3.3. INSULATED CABLE TRUNKING .................................................................................10
3.4. SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION ...........................................................11

SECTION 26 05 33 - CABLE TRUNKING
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Cable Trunking
1.2. WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to supply

and install the cable trunking systems as indicated on the drawings and
specified in these specifications.
B. Primary trunking routes are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor

shall include for additional trunking systems required from the primary
routes for cable run-outs to items of equipment, plant or isolation points.
C. The Contractor shall include for the design and installation of all trunking
systems necessary to support all sub-circuit and final circuit cables
throughout the length of run.
D. The Contractor shall provide all necessary trunking systems provided as

part of the contract. This includes systems as generally described within
the specification sections.

best International Standards and Codes of Practice and the
requirements of the Local Electricity Authority.
E. IEC 61084 - Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical

installations.
1.4. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall include for all necessary costs for coordinating
trunking systems with the Mechanical systems. Refer to all other trade
shop drawings for layouts of mechanical plant and equipment, ducting,
pipework and associated services.
B. Provide detailed and coordinated shop drawings for review by the

Engineer prior to installation of any service. Shop drawings shall include

all invert levels, including all sets and bends.
C. The Contractor will complete final coordination of the electrical

raceway containment systems (electrical distribution containments
including trunking, tray work and conduits) throughout the building with
specific coordination with other trade inputs such as structural,
mechanical, public health and fire protection systems. Final
coordinated working drawings shall be produced by the Contractor
and approved by the Contract Administrator, prior to installation.
D. The Contractor shall maintain a coordinated electrical raceway

containment system including design rules such as EMI separation
between power, emergency lighting, fire alarm, ELV and data/voice
cables. Failure to separate Class 1, 2 and 3 systems could result in
additional cost and delays incurred by Contractor.
1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall include for the preparation of detail installation

drawings of all trunking runs and for their submission to the Engineer for
review.
E. Shop drawings shall be distributed to all other trades for coordination of

services affected by these works.
1.6. DEDICATED TRUNKING SYSTEMS
Dedicated trunking systems shall be provided for the following electrical

services:
79 Lighting/power distribution circuits
80 Structured Cabling System to include Voice, Data, Video,

Security.
81 Lighting control system wiring
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. STEEL CABLE TRUNKING
A. Sheet steel cable trunking shall be used only in the areas and in the

positions detailed on the contract drawings or for terminating conduits

and cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking may be used, if
required, in the ceiling voids where otherwise large runs of multiple
conduits would occur.
B. Cable trunking and fittings shall be in accordance with IEC 61084-2-2

(galvanized) protected.
C. Cable trunking shall consist of butting sections constructed from high-

grade sheet steel rust-proofed by an approved process and be
galvanized as specified. Trunking lids shall be made from the same
material and shall be removable over the whole length of the trunking
and secured at centers not greater than 450mm by cadmium plated
mushroom head screws. These screws shall locate in Hank bushes. The
trunking shall be provided with return edges on its opening side to form
a tray and clips shall be inserted at centers not greater than 600mm to
retain the cables in position when the lids are removed.
D. Adjoining lengths of trunking shall be correctly aligned and the two sides
at right angles to the cover shall be jointed to the corresponding side of
the adjacent trunking piece by means of an internal fishplate connector
not less than 2.5mm thick, attached by means of not less than four
cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M.4 screws for trunking
having a depth of less than 150mm and eight cadmium plated steel
mushroom headed screws for trunking having a depth 150mm and
above, each passing through clearance holes, shake-proof washers
and nuts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be
connected by tinned copper links with split soldering washers under the
nuts, to provide electrical continuity across the joints.
E. Trunking shall be manufactured from not less than 1.2mm (18swg) thick
sheet steel for trunking up to 100mm x 100mm cross-section and a
minimum of 1.6mm (16 swig) for trunking sizes above this. Where the
trunking passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be
fitted, before erection, such that the cover plate extends approximately
50mm beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.
F. Separate compartments shall be provided in the trunking as necessary

and in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure the segregation of the
various services as detailed in this Specification section.
G. Circuits from more than one distribution board shall not be run in
common trunking systems unless approved by the Engineer.
H. All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded
corners. All angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners.
I. Trunking and trunking fittings shall be manufactured by a reputable

manufacturing / engineering company, with facilities for fast delivery of
trunking and purpose-made pieces of trunking whose shape shall be
determined by dimensions obtained from site.
J. Cable trunking used external to the building fabric shall be stainless steel
type.
K. Submit catalogue details of proposed trunking system to the Engineer

for review.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
A. Trunking shall only be installed in situations which will remain readily

accessible throughout the life of the building. Cable trunking shall not
be installed behind a plastered ceiling or in other inaccessible situations
except where agreed in writing by Engineer.
B. The trunking layouts indicated on the drawings show the minimum

requirement. Any additional trunking deemed necessary shall be shown
on the installation drawings prepared and submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The approval of any such additional trunking will be at the
discretion of the Engineer. Any additional cable trunking systems shown
shall be at no extra cost to the contract as they will be in the place of
conduits which should have been allowed to enclose the cabling
systems.
C. Where cable trunking is installed within ceiling voids, the trunking shall be
located as near as is practical to the rear of the ceiling grid whilst still
allowing the removal of ceiling tiles or access panels. The cable trunking

shall be run below other services including ductwork, pipework and

public health services. The cable trunking system shall be independently
supported by drop rods and support steel works from the structural soffit.
Allow for the installation of all such steel works.
3.2. SHEET STEEL CABLE TRUNKING
A. The Engineer must be consulted as to precise details concerning

trunking routes and applications.
B. All lengths of trunking shall be butt jointed and connected together by

internally fitted couplings of sufficient width to provide a minimum
bearing face of 25mm to each section being joined on all three faces.
The lengths shall be bolted together on site or welded at the factory. The
coupling will be of the same material as the trunking body.
C. For trunking systems having a cross section area up to 5,650mm2, 4 No

M4 cadmium plated steel screws will be utilized per coupling. For
trunking over 5,650mm2, 8 No similar screws will be utilized. The screws
will either be terminated into pre-tapped fixed bushes, or into nuts and
shake proof washers.
D. A tinned copper link shall be fitted across each trunking joint to ensure
electrical continuity. The link may be fixed by 2 of the joint securing
screws, one on each section of trunking.
E. Adequate provision shall be made to allow for expansion on all installed

lengths of trunking. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided as
required.
F. All tee pieces and bends shall be formed with similar means of
connection and the inner radius area shall be such that cables will not
be bent through a radius less than that prescribed in the current edition
of IEC 60364. Only bends and tees of approved pattern will be
accepted.
G. The trunking shall have an overlapping well-fitted lid securely fixed to the
trunking by approved means that will avoid damage to the cables. Self-
trapping screws shall not be used. The lid will be removable throughout
the entire length of the trunking system and be of the same material as

the trunking body. The lid fixing centers shall not be greater than 450mm
and cadmium plated screws shall be used.
H. All necessary accessories including long sleeve couplings, end pieces,

bends, sets, tees, reducers, branches, fillets, spin racks, cable retainers
etc., shall be allowed for in the Tender, and shall be purpose made by
the manufacturer. Fabrication on site will not be permitted.
I. Where a change in direction of a trunking run occurs, the deviation

should be effected by a purpose made unit manufactured on similar
lines to the bends and tee pieces described above. Where this is not
practical, changes in direction shall be fabricated in a neat and
workmanlike manner. All joints shall fit closely and gaps will not be
permitted.
J. All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed and no screw shall protrude
into the trunking.
K. Trunking shall be firmly attached to its associated equipment either by

bolted flanges or by male bushes and couplings.
L. Connections to metal clad switchgear, including distribution boards,

switch disconnectors, switch fuses, bus bar chambers and main
switchboards shall be direct bolted connections. A co-incident oval slot
shall be cut into the item of switchgear and into the trunking system. A
Paxolin or similar insert shall be cut to fit between the switchgear and the
trunking having a similar oval slot but reduced in size by 5mm all around.
The size of the slot within the Paxolin will be sufficient to allow unrestricted
space for the circuit conductors. The Paxolin insert shall be of a minimum
of 5mm thick and sharp corners produced from cutting shall be
removed. A copper earth bonding tape shall be run between the item
of switchgear and the trunking to ensure electrical continuity. The cross-
sectional area of the tape shall be such to provide the same copper
conductance of that provided by the steel trunking.
M. Where trunking is connected to equipment by means of flange

connectors the entry into the equipment shall be of the same cross-
section as the trunking.

N. When trunking does not terminate in equipment the otherwise open end
shall be capped with a cover suitably bolted in position.
O. Where communications, extra low voltage circuits etc., are contained

in a trunking the requisite number of separate compartments shall be
provided to segregate the wiring. Where conduits are taken off such
trunking they shall not pass through other compartment s unless prior
permission is obtained from the Engineer. The separation between
compartments shall be maintained at all tees angles reducers etc. to
ensure complete segregation is maintained.
P. Proprietary cross over sections shall be used wherever a fire cable, extra
low voltage cable or mains cable are required to pass through a
dedicated compartment of the trunking. On no accounts shall any
crossing of compartments be made without the consent of the
Engineer.
Q. The entire trunking system shall be electrically and mechanically

continuous throughout.
R. Where trunking is required to be recessed in the structure of the building

the finished edge of the trunking is to be installed flush with the plaster
work, the lid shall be of the overlapping type.
S. Trunking runs shall be so arranged that the lid or cover plate is always on
the top or side and not underneath, unless this cannot be avoided in
which case the Engineer's permission shall be obtained.
T. Wherever trunking passes through walls vertical partitions etc., a fixed

piece of trunking lid shall be fitted to the trunking extending 25mm either
side of the wall. Care shall be taken to see that no orifice is left between
the trunking and the building structure through which fire might spread.
In addition, a suitable barrier of incombustible material shall be provided
and fitted inside the trunking, in accordance with Part 5 of the current
edition of IEC 60364.
U. On vertical runs of trunking internal incombustible barriers shall be fitted

at a distance not greater than 5m, in accordance with Part 5 of the
current edition of IEC 60364.

V. All vertical runs of trunking which pass through floors shall be fitted with
fire barriers in accordance with Part 5 of the current edition of IEC 60364.
W. All trunking shall be fixed so as to drain off any condensed moisture.
X. All necessary trunking support work, hangers, brackets and fixing

requirements shall be provided. The fixings shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall not be spaced greater
than 1.2m.
Y. Earth links of the appropriate size and type shall be installed at every
joint, coupling, manufactured bend, tee, etc., throughout the entire
trunking system. Notwithstanding the above, separate circuit protective
conductors shall be run with every circuit.
Z. In cases where sheet steel trunking is installed on wooden floor joists or

similar applications, and there is a danger of movement, a flexible earth
conductor shall be installed bonding all joints in the trunking. This shall be
fitted in addition to the standard earth links.
AA. Purpose made spring type cable retaining clips shall be fitted at one-
meter intervals, unless trunking is installed with the cover on the top side.
BB. Insulated cable support pins shall be fitted at intervals of three (3) meters
in vertical run of trunking to adequately support the enclosed cables.
CC. The conductors of each separate circuit within the trunking system shall
be taped together with insulating tape at intervals not exceeding 1.2m.
Identification sleeves shall be fitted at each junction or tapping point.
DD. Cable trunking systems shall be sized to provide a minimum of 25% spare
capacity for future cabling. This spare capacity shall be calculated in
accordance with the space factor limitations as noted within the current
EE. All paintwork that has been damaged or removed during the on-site
erection of the system shall be treated in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations upon completion of the system
installation.
FF. Where vertical runs of LSF or PVC cables enclosed in trunking exceed

8m, the enclosed cables shall be adequately supported by approved

carrier rods inserted in the trunking at not more than 3m center with the
cable effectively bound to the rods having ISO metric threads
complying with the requirements of IEC 60335-2-64.
3.3. INSULATED CABLE TRUNKING
A. Insulated trunking shall only be used where an insulated conduit system

is being installed unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. The trunking shall be adequately fixed at intervals not exceeding one

meter. Fixing holes shall be slotted to allow any subsequent expansion
due to temperature variations.
C. Insulated trunking shall not be installed where ambient temperatures are

expected to exceed + 60 oC or fall below -5oC. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the trunking is not deformed by fixings, this applies
particularly when trunking is fixed to an uneven surface. Unobtrusive
packing pieces shall be introduced in order that the trunking shall be
securely fixed level and plumb without being deformed.
D. Purpose made spring type cable retaining clips shall be fitted at one-
meter intervals, unless trunking is installed with the cover on the top side.
E. Insulated cable support pins shall be fitted at intervals of 4 meters in

vertical runs of trunking and at the top of the vertical trunking.
F. Internal fire barriers shall be fitted where vertical trunking passes through
floors.
G. Overlapping cover plates shall be fitted where installed flush with the
building fabric. The finished edge of the trunking shall finish flush with the
finished surface.
H. Insulated trunking shall be fitted with manufacturer's standard tees, off-

sets and other fittings where changes of direction occurs.
I. Where trunking terminates manufacturer's standard plates and flares

shall be fitted to connect to items of equipment.
J. Joints shall be effected using the manufacturer's standard internal

connectors and in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
K. Installations shall be in accordance with the appropriate conditions

covering the installations of insulated conduit.
L. Separate protective conductors shall be installed in the trunking.
M. All joints and fabricated bends etc. in insulated trunking shall be made
in a neat and workmanlike manner and all joints in trunking and in
trunking cover shall fit closely and be free from gaps. Additional fixing
shall be provided to the building structure 50mm either side of the joint.
N. Joints in the lid and trunking must not be allowed to coincide.
O. The manufacturer's recommendations regarding the installation of

insulated trunking must be adhered to at all times.
P. all conduit entries shall be made by means of purpose made bushes

and couplings or adaptors.
Q. Proprietary cross over sections shall be used wherever a fire cable, extra
low voltage cable or mains cable are required to pass through a
dedicated compartment of the trunking. The Engineer shall be advised
of all occurrences of crossovers at the time of installation.
3.4. SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
A. The minimum cable trunking requirement shown on the drawings shall

be supplemented if required. Proposals for any such supplementary
trunking shall be indicated on the installation drawings at the time of
submission for approval. It shall be clearly understood that the
introduction of supplementary trunking runs or the increase of
compartment size will be allowed only at the discretion of the MEP
Consultant and if accepted shall be regarded as a concession to permit
cables that would otherwise be enclosed in conduit to be
accommodated in trunking. This shall be at no extra cost to the
contract.
B. Cable trunking installed on the exposed surface of walls shall be

arranged with the respective wiring compartments in the vertical plane
with all conduits emanating from the top, bottom and side of the

assembly. In all cases the access lid shall be fitted to the exposed side
of such assemblies. Allow for the supply and installation of flat MS
bracket supports for this cable trunking giving a 25mm clearance
between the rear of the trunking and the wall.
C. Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings

wherever possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in
a horizontal plane with the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking
and all conduits connected to the top and side of the assembly. A
similar 25mm clearance shall be arranged to the rear face of the
trunking.
D. The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the ceiling

structure within ceiling voids, generally below and clear of mechanical,
air conditioning and public health services. Trunking shall be supported
by purpose made brackets suspended from structural concrete ceiling
slab soffit.
E. The trunking lid cover shall be removable over the whole length. Where
trunking passes through walls and ceilings a short length of fixed cover
shall be provided to form a sleeve of 25mm on each side.
F. Trunking shall be supported by purpose-made brackets suspended from

the structural concrete ceiling slab soffit.
G. Trunking shall be fitted with flush heavy-duty lids where used for floor
installations.
H. Conduits used to complete the final section of each circuit from the
general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise
stated, shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of
the cable trunking and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits
shall then be taken through the structural slab or be arranged to drop
vertically to terminate at the various lighting, power, telephone or
auxiliary service outlet points.
I. Trunking shall be painted to the requirement of IEC 61084 where the

galvanizing is damaged.
J. The treatment of trunking at fire barriers see the Fire Transit section of this

specification.
K. Metal and plastic trunking shall be supported as indicated in the

following table. The table does not apply to special lighting trunking
which is provided with strengthened couplers.
Metal Insulating
Trunking mm Vertical Vertical
Horizontal Horizontal
up to 25 x 25 0.75 1.0 0.5 0.5

up to 50 x 25 1.20 1.5 0.5 0.5
up to 50 x 50 1.20 1.8 1.0 1.20
up to 100 x 50 1.20 .8 1.0 1.20
For larger trunking sizes and multi-compartment pattern and

manufacturers recommendations shall be observed.
A. Identify the route of all primary and secondary trunking routes on the as-
installed Record Drawings.
This shall include all sizes and reducer connections.
B. Include manufacturers published data on Trunking systems within the

O&M Manual.

SECTION 26 05 34 - RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Cable Trays for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 - 0

SECTION 26 05 34
RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................2

1.3. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................2
1.4. SHOP DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................3
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................3
2.1. CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES (CLASS 4) ......................................................................3
2.2. CONDUIT FITTINGS .....................................................................................................4
2.3. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT .....................................................................................................4
2.4. ACCESSORIES BOXES ................................................................................................5
2.5. PLASTIC CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES .........................................................................5
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................6
3.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................6
3.2. CAST-IN CONDUITS ...................................................................................................9
3.3. CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES BOXES .........................................................................10
3.4. CONDUIT FITTINGS ...................................................................................................15
3.5. LOCKING, BUSHING & COUPLING.........................................................................17
3.6. CONTINUITY & EARTHING .......................................................................................18
3.7. PAINTING OF CONDUIT ..........................................................................................18
3.8. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ...................................................................................................18
3.9. ACCESSORIES BOXES ..............................................................................................19
3.10. PLASTIC CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES .......................................................................19
3.11. CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION DABS ............................................................................20
Raceways & Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 34 - 1

SECTION 260534 - RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

best International Standards and
B. Codes of Practice and the requirements of the Local Supply Authority

Regulations.
C. The entire installation shall be installed and tested in accordance with

the relevant Codes and requirements of the Local Supply Authority.
Where local codes are not present, International
D. Electrical Codes/Standards will be used to identify requirements.
• IEC 61035-2-1 and IEC 60670 – Specification, Steel Conduit and

Fittings for Electrical Wiring.
• IEC 61386 – Part 1 Flexible Steel Conduit and Adaptors for the
Protection of the Electric Cable.
• IEC 60614-2-1 – Specification for Steel Conduit and Fittings with

Metric Threads of ISO Form for Electrical Installations.
• IEC 60092-352 – Choice and Installation of Electrical Cables.
In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

most stringent shall be applied.
The Contractor shall provide a schedule identifying all differences for

Client/Engineer’s determination.
1.3. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor will complete final coordination of the electrical

raceway containment systems (electrical distribution containments
including trunking, tray work and conduit s) throughout the building with

specific coordination with other trade inputs such as structural,

mechanical, public health and fire protection systems. Final
coordinated working drawings shall be produced by the Contractor
and approved by the Contract Administrator, prior to installation.
B. The Contractor shall maintain a coordinated electrical raceway

containment system including design rules such as EMI separation
between power, emergency lighting, fire alarm, ELV and data/voice
cables. Failure to separate Class 1, 2 and 3 systems could result in
additional cost and delays incurred by the Contractor.
1.4. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The excavation and backfilling of trenches, provision of sifted sand and

buried cable conduits shall be carried out and arranged by the main
Contractor.
B. Include for the preparation of detailed drawings to identify trenching

requirements and the actual execution of all necessary excavations,
backfilling of cable trenches and the provision of cable ducts,
manholes, inspection chambers etc.
C. Services covered shall include buried HV and LV cables, incoming and

distributed telecommunications cables, networked services such as fire
alarm systems, BMS systems and public address systems.
D. Provide dedicated ducting for individual services. Under no

circumstances shall HV, LV or ELV cabled services share the same duct
or buried conduit.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES (CLASS 4)
A. All metal conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, seam welded, steel tube
screwed conduits manufactured to IEC61386 “Steel Conduits and
Fittings with Metric Threads of ISO Form for Electrical Installations”, EN
60423 and EN 50086. All conduits shall be appropriately selected such
that they are fully compatible with the local environmental conditions in
which they are to be installed, and also for the surfaces that they are to

be fixed to. Indoor conduits shall be Class 2, conduits located outside or

in damp situations shall be Class 4.
B. Any conduits and fittings which do not conform to specification or are

damaged due to poor storage and handling on or off site shall be
rejected and removed from site.
C. Where a Class 4 installation is utilized in damp conditions or externally,

gaskets shall be fitted to all boxes. Adaptable boxes in such
circumstances shall have external fixing lugs.
D. All conduit and accessories shall be heavy gauge Class 4 galvanized

(hot dipped, zinc coated and sherardized) in the following areas:
82 Plantrooms and wet areas
83 External areas
84 Where additional mechanical strength required
85 In ceiling voids/plenums
E. Conduit shall be provided from an approved manufacturer / supplier
2.2. CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Conduit fittings and accessories shall be finished to match the conduit

system and shall comply with EN 60423 and EN 50086. All conduit fittings
shall be screwed or loop in malleable iron type fitted with covers
secured by brass screws. Rectangular adaptable hot dip galvanized
steel boxes may be used on multi-conduit runs.
B. Male and female bushes shall be brass and shall be manufactured to

comply with the same EN as for other conduit fittings noted above. All
screwed couplers, lock nuts and reducers shall be made of malleable
iron.
2.3. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Conduit connections to motors or other such items of removable

equipment, unless otherwise stated, shall be made with LS0H sheathed
metallic flexible conduit, in accordance with the attached Schedules
and to IEC 61386.

B. All such metallic flexible conduit shall be composed of double

aluminium with bitumen infused paper interleaf, with a LS0H overall
sheath. Each end of the flexible conduit shall be terminated by a
coupler comprising a union, lead seal and screwed nut. Each coupler
shall have a male thread for connecting to a standard IEC 61035-2-1 box
or an equipment terminal box.
C. Flexible conduit shall be provided from an approved manufacturer /

supplier.
2.4. ACCESSORIES BOXES
A. All accessory boxes shall be metallic and manufactured in accordance

with IEC 61035-2-1. All boxes shall be minimum 35mm deep.
2.5. PLASTIC CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic conduits shall not be used unless cast in situ or concealed within
ceiling voids or as specifically requested during the Contract.
B. Insulated conduits shall be heavy gauge, high impact and

manufactured to comply with IEC 61386 and 60614 nonmetallic
conduits and fittings for Electrical Installations. All conduit boxes,
couplings, draw -in boxes, etc., shall be of the same manufacture and
quality as the conduit. They shall be of the heavy gauge, high impact
type, self-extinguishing PVC/LS0H, free from imperfections with smooth
internal and external surfaces and have a minimum diameter of 20mm.
The conduit shall be suitable for use in ambient temperatures up to
55oC. The conduit shall be non-hygroscopic and self-extinguishing.
C. All bends and sets shall be in accordance with Part 5 of the current
edition of IEC 60364 formed with the aid of a helical spring fitted
internally, with, if necessary, the conduit warmed sufficiently for it to
move without deformation of the bore, and without avoidable wall
thinning on the outside of the bend.
D. Accessories boxes for small power outlets shall be metallic with plastic
branches/fixing supplied to suit for flush installation and plastic where
surface.

E. Circular boxes shall be provided for all outlet points for luminaires and
ceiling switches. Boxes shall have fitted brass earth terminals and be
heat resistant and reinforced with tapped metal inserts for fitting and
fixing screws. Extension collars shall be provided to bring the aperture of
the box flush with the wall/ceiling finish.
F. Adaptable boxes shall be to the same specification as the conduit with

the PVC lids fixed by brass or nylon screws. Adaptable boxes smaller
than 75mm x 50mm or larger than 300m m x 300mm shall not be used.
Where cable joints are permitted or specified, ensure boxes are of
adequate size to contain the terminal block and space for making neat
satisfactory connections.
G. Terminal blocks shall be porcelain type and fixed to the adaptable box
using brass or nylon screws.
H. For surface mounted PVC conduits, saddles of the spacer bar type shall
be provided with 3mm clearance. Fix saddles with brass screws.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. Generally, conduits will be utilized for the final run out to terminal
equipment and devices.
B. Identify conduit with coloured paint dabs as identified under this section.
C. The minimum conduit size used shall be 20mm
D. All bends formed in conduits shall be made in a conduit bending

machine fitted with a former of the correct radii for each conduit size.
The bends shall be made without altering the section of the conduit or
opening the seams of the conduit. The inside radius of all bends shall
exceed 3 times the external diameter of the conduit.
E. All conduits shall be secured in an efficient pipe vice whilst being cut,
screwed and reamed.
F. Conduits shall be installed either vertically or horizontally and generally

be installed in line or perpendicular to the building structure.

G. The whole of the conduit installation shall be coordinated with other

services to be installed in the building or buildings, and routes shall be
agreed with the Engineer prior to the commencement of the installation.
Conduits shall be installed at least 250mm from hot water pipes and at
least 50mm from other service pipes, cables and ducts.
H. Conduits shall be bonded to other services in accordance with the

requirements of the current edition of IEC 60364.
I. Unless otherwise noted all conduits must be concealed, being run in roof
spaces, behind suspended ceilings, under floors, within in situ cast
concrete, or in cut/cast chases into walls. Surface run conduit
J. installations will only be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer. All

conduits that are to be concealed shall be inspected and tested prior
to enclosure. Surface conduit work shall only be allowed where methods
of construction preclude the concealment of the conduit and on fair
faced brickwork or block work subject to approval to the Engineer.
K. Conduit runs shall be planned to obviate the need for draw in boxes,
but where the use of such boxes is unavoidable, they shall be accessible
at all times and be fitted with covers.
L. Conduit systems shall be complete and continuous throughout.

Luminaires and other equipment bodies shall not be used for through
wiring.
M. Where conduits cross expansion joints proprietary expansion couplings

shall be utilized. Earth continuity shall be maintained by LS0H sheathed
green/yellow copper conductors with minimum cross-sectional areas of
4mm connected to each side of the expansion joints by proprietary
earth clamps.
N. Prior to the drawing of any cables the complete conduit system shall be
swabbed to remove any debris or moisture.
O. Conduits shall be stored in dry conditions prior to installation. All conduits

damage mechanically or by oxidization will be rejected.
P. The installation of conduit boxes in floors shall generally be avoided but

where it is essential it shall be agreed with the Engineer. The floor

mounted boxes shall be fitted with brass covers recessed to
accommodate the floor finish. The covers shall seal the box against the
ingress of moisture.
Q. Conduit boxes used for drawing in purposes shall be installed complete

with well-fitting rubber gaskets unless detailed otherwise.
R. When conduits are specified as being installed on the surface the runs
must be arranged to render the whole system as neat and
inconspicuous as possible having regard to existing Architectural
features. All vertical and horizontal runs must be plumbed and levelled
respectively.
S. Particular care must be taken to obtain a symmetrical layout where

conduits converge and run together near distribution centers. The
distance between conduits shall be maintained through bends and sets
and shall not noticeably vary.
T. All conduit runs must be designed to permit wiring to be readily installed

after the complete erection of the conduits through the available draw-
in, accessory and luminaire suspension boxes.
U. No conduit runs will be allowed to be laid underground in any

circumstances whatsoever.
V. Cable drawing facilities shall be provided no greater than 6m apart for

straight lengths of conduit installation and after every 2 right angle
bends or equivalent sets.
W. In cases where it is necessary to install draw in boxes, where a number

of circuits of the same voltage run together in the same direction,
adaptable junction boxes of the required size to take all conduits shall
be fixed in the run to facilitate the drawing-in of the cables instead of
inserting a separate circular box in each individual run.
X. Conduit runs should have a pull box every 3m or after two bends to
enable future pulling capability.
Y. In all positions where the appearance of the conduit layout would be

improved by the introduction of dummy lengths of conduit and in all

cases where a more secure fixing for the suspension of fittings is
considered necessary and would be obtained by continuing the
conduits from their respective normal terminations, such dummy
conduits and continuations must be included for and introduced.
Z. Where surface mounted equipment (other than luminaires) is specified

all concealed conduits shall be terminated in a conduit or an
adaptable box installed recessed into the wall at every surface
mounted equipment position. The recessed box shall be completely
covered by the surface mounted equipment. Provision shall be made in
the back of the surface mounted equipment for the conveying of
cables (including protective conductor) from the conduit system via a
suitably bushed opening.
AA. Any opening between the recessed box and the surface mounted
equipment shall be closed when surface mounted equipment is fixed,
to prevent the ingress of dirt etc.
BB. Where surface mounted luminaires are to be fixed to a concealed

conduit system the boxes shall be circular. Screwed metal caps or plugs
shall be used to protect the open ends of conduits and boxes.
CC. Special care shall be taken to prevent foreign matter entering the
conduit. Cork plugs shall be used at temporary conduit terminations to
prevent the ingress of foreign matter.
3.2. CAST-IN CONDUITS
A. Cast in conduits shall be provided to suit the works programmes for the
concrete walls and floor slabs as necessary.
B. Runs of conduit shall be installed vertically straight wherever possible.
C. Allow for full coordination with the Structural Contractors drawings and
take full cognizance of his programme and sequence of works.
D. Install conduit runs in time to suit concrete pours.
E. Provide shop drawings detailing the setting out of cast in conduits prior
to installation.

F. Cast in conduit to be high impact plastic.
3.3. CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES BOXES
A. Circuits shall be segregated in accordance with the current edition of

IEC 60364. Ancillary services, extra low voltage circuits, fire
detection/alarm and emergency lighting circuits shall in all cases be run
in dedicated conduits.
B. Only circuit conductors originating from the same distribution board shall
be run together in the same conduit/trunking system. Circuit conductors
from different systems or from different distribution boards shall not be
run in the same conduit system or conduit accessory box. All circuit
conductors of a particular circuit shall be enclosed within the same
conduit. A separate protective conductor shall be run in all cases.
C. At intersection points on the multiple conduit runs, steel adaptable

boxes with light steel covers (overlapping for concealed conduit work)
shall be used in accordance with IEC. All such adaptable boxes shall
have a minimum depth of 1.5 times the largest conduit entry. Cables
from more than one distribution board shall not enter any single
adaptable box.
D. No cables apart from draw wires shall be drawn into a conduit system
until it is completely finished. No conduits shall be filled beyond the
maximum capacities set out in the appropriate tables within the current
E. Any conduit work rejected by the Engineer shall be replaced at no extra

cost.
F. The manufacturer's threads applied to each length of conduit shall be

reduced in length to conceal the thread in the conduit box fitting or
accessory without protrusion and cleaned by means of conduit tap or
die before installation. Each joint shall have however a minimum of 6
threads.
G. The ends of all conduits shall be reamed internally to give a smooth bore.
No thread shall be exposed except at running couplers.

H. Running couplers shall be backed by a securely locked heavy gauge

lock nut and excess threads painted with zinc-rich paint for H.D.Z.C.S.
I. All couplers shall be securely tightened and care shall be taken to

ensure that conduits butt -up inside the couplers.
J. No conduit bearing traces of rust or damage shall be used. The conduits

shall be cleaned and free from oil before installation.
K. Conduit shall be laid as far as possible in straight lines with easy sets or
bends. Conduit to be formed shall be bent cold without altering the
section with an approved type of machine. Such bends and sets shall
be painted with good quality paint wherever the finish has been
removed. The conduit shall be run so as to be self-draining to switch
boxes, incorporating, as necessary, an approved means of draining.
L. Where condensation is likely to occur, the section shall be isolated by

means of non -hardening plastic compound in a conduit box installed
for this purpose at a high level in the run.
M. Conduits entering equipment or accessories shall do so through

clearance holes only and connection shall be made by means of a
hexagonal male brass bush, earth continuity washer and coupler.
N. Connections to cable trunking and large sheet steel adaptable boxes

shall be made by means of a hexagonal male brass bush of the long-
threaded type, earth continuity washer, washer and flanged coupler.
Standard round boxes in accordance with and with 50.8mm fixing

centers and of malleable iron shall be used for all intersection and outlet
points, except where the conduit terminates in accessories such as
lighting switches, socket outlets, etc.
O. At intersection points on the multiple conduit runs, steel adaptable

boxes with light steel covers (overlapping for concealed conduit work)
shall be used. All such adaptable boxes shall have a minimum depth of
1.5 times the largest conduit entry. Cables from more than one
distribution board shall not enter any single adaptable box.
P. Conduits of a capacity sufficient to carry a full number of distribution

board circuit way cables shall be installed between trunking and

distribution boards. Conduits for sub-mains supplying the distribution
board shall be considered separately.
Q. Adaptable boxes and distribution boards, where not fixed to trunking,

shall be installed with 20mm or 25mm clearance holes suitably plugged,
with at least two holes for adaptable boxes and holes equal to spare
ways for distribution boards.
R. Manufactured solid or inspection elbows or tee pieces shall not be

permitted.
S. The conduit work shall be arranged so that the wiring can be drawn in
and out, and later renewed from draw-in box and point box positions.
Draw-in boxes and point boxes shall be of ample size to enable this to
be carried out.
T. Where conduits are cast in, the Contractor shall include for packing out
boxes etc. to ensure that pathways remain clear. The Contractor shall
include for rectifying any instance where conduits are blocked for
whatever reason.
U. No boxes shall be provided in voids where access cannot be readily

obtained. No draw-in boxes other than point boxes shall be installed in
the plaster wall or ceiling surface, where the conduit work is flush, except
within cupboards and switch-rooms, or where specific permission is
given by the Engineer. If permission is given, each box shall be made
permanently accessible and so arranged to be neatly finished, flush with
the finished surface of the walls, ceilings or floors.
V. Conduit buried in concrete or plaster and chased into walls shall be

secured by holdfasts or crampets spaced at intervals not greater than
120mm and there shall be not less than 20mm covering over the final
projection of any holdfast coupling, conduit, etc. This Contract is to
include chasing for concealed conduit, the making of ways for the
conduit shall be carried out by machine raggling of all necessary walls,
floors, ceilings, etc. and it shall be noted that no other method of
raggling shall be accepted.

W. Conduits shall be tested for electrical continuity before plastering or

screeding and prior to drawing in cables. A record shall be kept of all
such tests.
X. Horizontal wall chases shall be limited to a maximum of 600mm.
Y. All surface conduit fixed to walls, ceiling and to the roof steelwork shall
be fixed by means of heavy gauge distance saddles spaced at intervals
not greater than 1200mm apart with additional saddles as necessary at
bends and joints and within 275mm of such points. Draw-in points shall
be available on such conduits every 8.00m of a straight run or after not
more than two right bends. Where such points are provided exclusively
for draw-in purposes, they shall be in the form of rectangular junction
boxes.
Z. No conduit or accessories smaller than 20mm shall be allowed and the

number of cables drawn into each conduit shall not exceed that stated
in the latest IEC Regulations.
AA. Conduit shall be threaded to the correct length as indicated in IEC

61035-2-1, recessed at both ends to remove all sharp edges and burrs
after screwing.
BB. Conduit runs shall be left clear of gas and water pipes by a minimum
distance of 150mm. Where conduit is, or may be, in contact with any
structural steelwork, an efficient and permanent connection shall be
made between the conduit and the metal work.
CC. No part of the conduit shall be under mechanical stress and each length
of conduit shall be swabbed out prior to the installation of the cables.
DD. All conduit boxes, saddles and point boxes shall be fixed by not less than
40mm x No.8 wood screws with suitable approved plugs in concrete or
brickwork, and not less than 25mm x No.8 wood screws in structural
timber. No fixing shall be made to building boards or to plaster, but only
to concrete, brickwork, timber structures and block or tile partitions.
EE. Countersunk screws shall be used to fixing only where special

countersunk holes have been drilled or provided. Round head screws
used for all fittings shall be black japanned finish. Screw heads shall have
all burrs and sharp edges removed before wiring commences and all
screws are to be driven into their correct depth. Box lids shall be fitted
by means of brass round headed M.4 screws.
FF. Conduits crossing expansion joints shall be fitted with expansion couplers
at the position of the expansion joint. An earth wire shall be installed
between the nearest conduit box at either side of the coupler. The back
of the conduit box shall be drilled and tapped to a size not less than M.4
and the earth connection made by means of an approved
combination of terminal washer and brass screws.
GG. Where conduits pass from inside the building to the outside, free
circulation of air shall be prevented by the insertion of a conduit box,
which shall be filled with plastic compound after the cables have been
drawn in.
HH. All flush boxes installed shall be recessed approximately 3mm below the
finished wall or ceiling surface. The Contract shall include for verification
on site with the Contractor for the finished thickness of all walls and
ceilings.
II. Attention shall be paid to the installation of surface conduits. All corners
and angles shall be neatly negotiated with vertical and horizontal runs
kept straight. No diagonal runs shall be permitted and all branches shall
be taken off at right angles.
JJ. The phase and neutral conductors of the same circuit or circuit shall be
drawn into the same conduit.
KK. The conductors forming the various systems shall be installed in separate
conduits or trunking compartments unless specifically agreed otherwise
in writing by the Engineer.
LL. All conduit which is left with screw ends for the reception of outlet boxes,
etc., shall be fitted with a coupler and screwed plug to protect the end.
MM. No conduit shall be installed in the vertical ducts specifically reserved for
the installation of the mechanical trade without the permission of the
Engineer.

NN. Where conduits are installed in floors where the screed is not be
completed within three days of the installation, then the conduits shall
be immediately protected by means of a haunching of a cement and
sand mixture.
OO. Conduits set through walls shall not be permitted. Where conduits
change direction through a wall, a back-outlet box shall be used.
PP. A running coupler socket within 300mm above or below the floor on all
vertical drops or pieces respectively shall be provided where conduit is
cast into or passes through structural floors.
QQ. No outlets shall be installed immediately behind each other (i.e. back-
to-back) in a common wall or partition, unless agreed in writing by the
Engineer. Separate conduits shall be taken to each outlet.
RR. Where electrical conduits are required to be distinguished from pipe

lines or other service s these shall be coloured orange as the basic
identification colour.
3.4. CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. All circular type boxes must be fitted with long screwed spout conduit
entries with the screwed thread terminating within the spout and the
edges of the internal orifice of the box rounded and smoothed to act
as a bush, excepting adaptable steel rectangular boxes and loop in
conduit boxes, in which case male bush and flanged coupling must be
used for conduit connections.
B. At multi conduit junctions where standard conduit boxes are impractical

to use, malleable cast iron adaptable boxes shall be utilized. The size of
the box shall be determined upon the volume and type of cables being
installed. The minimum box dimension shall be 150 x 150 x 50mm deep,
all boxes to be used shall be verified with the Engineer at the earliest
available opportunity. The boxes shall be complete with a malleable
cast iron flush lid secured by 4 No M4 brass pan head screws.
C. Where such boxes are required on flush conduit systems, they shall be
fitted with a 1.5mm galvanized steel lid which shall overlap the box by a
minimum of 6mm on all sides.
D. In situations where more than 3 No 25mm conduits are required to

terminate in one side of an adaptable box, the box size shall be
increased accordingly.
E. In concealed installations boxes shall be fixed with the rims flush with the
finished surfaces, but when for any reason whatever the rims are below
the surface, suitable extension rings of the required depth shall be
provided and installed to finish flush with the surrounding surfaces and
with the lids of sufficient oversize (7.5mm minimum all round) to cover
the junction between box and plaster.
F. In no case will the use of proprietary bends, sets, elbows, inspection

elbows or tees be permitted, unless specifically allowed in writing by the
Engineer to meet specific conditions.
G. Where the conduit system is the sole support of the luminaires via
conduit boxes, additional saddles disposed symmetrically about and
near to the point of suspension must be introduced for security o fixing.
H. Galvanized, sherardized or cadmium plated screws shall be used in all

cases where galvanized conduit is installed.
I. When conduits are required to be run on shuttering, prior to the laying

of concrete in -situ, additional security must be provided near to every
box and at intervals of not more than 1.2 meters by the introduction of
short lengths of steel wire, of not less than 2mm diameter twisted around
the conduit and reinforcing steel. The conduits shall be adequately fixed
to prevent excessive movement and damage during the pouring and
settling of concrete and shall be protected from mechanical damage.
J. Where conduits are left "open ended" prior to wiring they shall be
protected by caps or plugs to prevent the ingress of building materials
etc.
K. The building construction may require particular treatment in respect of

the fixing of conduit and/or fittings in order to obtain permanent security.
The drilling and tapping of non -structural steelwork, the supply and fixing
of metal straps, supports, clips, clamps and plates and the introduction
of additional conduits of larger sizes than actually required for wiring,

together with all fixing devices, must be included for wherever such
practices are necessary, and particularly when luminaires etc., have to
be supported independently of specially suspended ceilings. The
Engineer’s written approval shall be obtained before any hole is drilled
or cut in structural steel or structural concrete.
3.5. LOCKING, BUSHING & COUPLING
A. All conduit ends must be filed square and reamed before erection to
ensure freedom from internal burrs and roughness. All inside surface of
the conduit system shall be free from projections.
B. Running couplings shall only be used where absolutely necessary. All

running couplings shall be secured by means of lock nuts or lock rings.
C. Care shall be taken to ensure all locknuts seat firmly into the adjoining
surface.
D. On galvanized steel conduit installations galvanized internal threaded

couplings shall be used.
E. Every conduit connection to equipment, boxes, distribution boards,

loop-in boxes, cable trunking etc. shall be made by means of a smooth
bore brass bush. The smooth bore bush shall be fitted to secure the
conduit to the item connected via a purpose made clear hole only
sufficiently large to permit the bush to be rotated, the hole to be closed
by the bush and coupling with all bushes on the inside of the item of
equipment. Bushes shall be fitted and tightened by means of correctly
fitting spanners.
F. Damaged bushes must not be fitted, and any bushes damaged whilst
being fitted must be removed and replaced.
G. Conduits connecting by couplings shall be connected by means of a

15mm long threaded section and shall have a gap of approximately
2mm between the adjoining threads. No threads shall be exposed
except at running couplings.
H. All free ends of conduit shall be fitted with brass female bushes.
I. The complete conduit system shall be so arranged to ensure that any

condensation arising in any part of the system shall drain to a suitable

drainage point.
J. Specific anti condensation measures shall be taken where appropriate.
3.6. CONTINUITY & EARTHING
K. The whole of the conduit installations shall be mechanically and

electrically sound. The integrity of the conduit continuity shall be tested
with an appropriate test instrument, all in accordance with the current
L. Install a separate protective conductor in all conduit systems.
3.7. PAINTING OF CONDUIT
A. All exposed threads shall be painted and all conduits which have
suffered minor damage shall be made good to prevent oxidization.
Lubricants or cutting compound shall be removed from conduit prior to
painting. Galvanized conduit which is slightly damaged shall be primed
and painted with a metal-based paint to match the colour finish of the
conduit.
B. Conduits which are in the opinion of the Engineer more than slightly
damaged shall be rejected and replaced.
3.8. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Flexible conduit shall be terminated using approved glands, couplings

and bushes with serrated washer fitted to all bushes on the inside of the
equipment. External terminations shall also have a neoprene or rubber
washer between coupling and equipment.
B. In all instances a separate PVC insulated green and yellow coloured

protective conductor complying with the current t edition of IEC 60364
shall be installed and terminated at each end into purpose made
earthing terminals.
C. Under no circumstances will flexible conduit be accepted in lieu of sets

and bends in rigid conduit installations.
D. In normal circumstances flexible conduit shall have a minimum length of

300mm and a maximum unstretched length of 700mm. It shall permit a

full range of withdrawal, adjustment or movement of the equipment.
E. Each length of flexible conduit shall be complete with an approved

integral copper earth wire of 2.5mm sq. minimum size incorporated
during manufacture. As an alternative, an independent earth wire of
2.5mm sq. minimum size and complete with butyl rubber insulation shall
be installed in all such flexible conduit and shall be connected to the
accessory terminal at one end and an M.4 brass screw and washer
tapped into the back or side of a conduit box at the other. This is to
ensure electrical continuity across the flexible joints.
F. Flexible conduits shall not be less than 300mm and more than 1.00m in
length unless permitted in writing by the Engineer.
3.9. ACCESSORIES BOXES
A. Boxes shall be fixed by not less than 40mm x no.8 wood screws with
suitable approved plug in concrete or brickwork and not less than 25mm
x no.8 wood screws in structural timber.
B. Where boxes are provided in partitions, noggins shall be provided to

enable a firm and rigid fixing.
C. All flush boxes installed shall be recessed approximately 3mm below the
finished wall. Where installed in dry lining, boxes shall be supplied with
extension collars to achieve this. No box shall be installed immediately
behind each other (i.e. back-to-back) in a common wall or partition,
unless agreed in writing by the MEP Consultant.
3.10. PLASTIC CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic conduits shall generally be installed in accordance with the

requirements for steel conduit, sing plastic fittings, circular, boxes, bends
and sets to IEC 61035-2-1 as applicable.
B. Lengths of conduit shall be coupled together by means of couplings

secured by an adhesive solution approved by the conduit
manufacturer. All other plastic accessories shall be fixed in a similar
manner. Insert square cut conduits to the full depth of the spout.

C. Bends and sets in plastic conduit shall be formed by the use of a helical
spring fitted within the conduit. The conduit shall be warmed sufficiently
for the bend to be formed without deforming the conduit and causing
excessive thinning of the conduit bore on the outside of the bend.
D. Connections to boxes on equipment shall be by means of plastic bushes

fitted within the equipment and locking rings fitted externally.
E. Expansion couplers shall be fitted every 6.0m on straight lengths secured

to one conduit and a sliding fix to the other using flexible adhesive to
prevent the ingress of moisture.
F. Where conduits are to be embedded in concrete, they shall be to IEC

61035-2-1 and be installed to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Conduits shall be secured by plastic spacer bar saddles at the following

distances:
86 Maximum horizontal spacing 1.0m
87 Maximum vertical spacing 1.2m
H. Cover conduit buried in floor and/or roof screeds with at least 25mm
depth over the entire length. Plan and install conduit routes so that
crossings are avoided, and lay parallel conduit 150mm apart.
I. Where concealed in plastered walls, cover conduits with 12mm cover

along the entire length. Avoid horizontal routes.
J. Ensure conduits laid in in-situ concrete are securely fixed to the

reinforcement steelwork. Fix conduit boxes to the shuttering.
K. Make fixings by means of single hole plastic half-clips. Place these at

intervals to comply with the Current Edition of IEC 60364 and at all
changes of direction to prevent displacement.
L. Standard boxes shall be circular pattern with push fit spouts to IEC 61035
-2-1, with a PVC lid held in place with brass or nylon screws.
3.11. CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION DABS
A. Use coloured paint dabs on the inside of outlet boxes and paint interior
side of the panel covers as they are installed. In ceiling spaces, provide

colour to outside of boxes.
B. Paint colour to match system colours as defined in finishes. Paint colour

code shall be as follows: -
C. Red-Life Safety System
D. Pink-Intercom & Public Address System
E. Black-Annunciator & Buzzer System
F. Green-230V IPH Circuits
G. Purple-Telephone/data communication system
H. Blue-400/230V Circuits
I. Orange-Security Alarm System

SECTION 26 05 36 – CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................2

1.2. WORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................2
1.4. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................3
1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................3
1.6. DEFINITION OF TERMS ...............................................................................................3
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................3
2.1. CABLE TRAY ...............................................................................................................3
2.2. LADDER RACK ...........................................................................................................5
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................5
3.1. CABLE TRAY & LADDER RACK ..................................................................................5
3.2. RECORD INFORMATION ...........................................................................................7

SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Cable Trays
1.2. WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to supply

and install all cable tray and or ladder rack systems as indicated on the
drawings and specified in these specifications.
B. Primary cable tray and ladder rack routes are indicated on the
drawings. The Contractor shall include for additional cable support
systems required from the primary routes for cable run -outs to items of
equipment, plant or isolation points.
C. The Contractor shall include for the design and installation of all tray and
ladder rack systems necessary to support all main and sub-main cables
throughout the length of run.
D. The Contractor shall provide all necessary cable trays for systems
provided as part of the contract. This includes systems such as fire
alarms, emergency lighting, communications systems and all others
systems as described within the specification sections.

current issue of the IEC 60364 and the requirements of the local supply
authority.

the relevant International
C. Electrical Codes and International Standards and requirements of the

Local Supply Authority.
D. In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

E. The Contractor shall provide a schedule identifying all differences for

1.4. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall include for all necessary costs for coordinating
cable tray and ladder rack installations with Mechanical trade. Refer to
all other trade shop drawings for layouts of mechanical plant and
equipment, ducting, pipework and associated services.
B. Provide detailed and coordinated shop drawings for review by the

Engineer prior to installation of any service. Shop drawings shall include
all invert levels, including all sets and bends.
1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall include for the preparation of detail installation

drawings of all cable trays and ladder rack runs and for their submission
to the Engineer for review.
B. Shop drawings shall be distributed to all other trades for co -ordination

of services affected by these works.
C. Shop drawings shall also show the cables that are to be installed on the
individual containment systems. Submit details of the weights of the
cable trays and ladder racks and fixing details for the Engineer for
review.
1.6. DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Full loaded shall mean an evenly distributed load (cables being spaced
as indicated on the drawings/specification) and including the weight of
future cables added in a similar manner to fill the rack.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. CABLE TRAY
A. Cable tray shall be provided in the positions indicated on the contract

drawings.
B. Cable tray shall be of the perforated type formed from plain sheet steel

conforming to IEC 61537 in accordance with the following:
Thickness
Flange (Not
Width Pattern (Not less less than)
than)
Up to 75mm Standard 1.00mm 2.0mm
From 100mm to Standard 1.20mm 2.0mm
150mm
Heavy Duty 1.50mm 5.0mm
From 201mm to
Heavy Duty 2.00mm 50.0mm
450mm
Returned
Above 450mm
Flange
C. Cable tray shall be manufactured from mild steel hot dip galvanized
finish to IEC 61537. Each length of tray shall be finished with return edge
of a minimum of 7mm.
D. Cable tray shall be of a minimum size as detailed in the Specification

Section and/or on the drawings and be of adequate width for disposing
the cables at single depth, or groups of single core MICS cables, with a
40% width allowance for spare cables.
E. All cable trays shall be heavy duty unless otherwise stated on the
drawings or in the specification.
F. Fabricate all cable tray products with rounded edges and smooth
surfaces.
G. Fittings: support brackets, profile clamps, joints, couplings, bends, end

covers etc. shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable tray and
shall be specifically designed for the type of system used.
H. The cable support system shall be Hot Dip Galvanized Steel according
to SS-EN-ISO 1461 specifications including all internal surfaces. The cable
support system shall be so designed to carry a load of not less than 70
kg / meter with a support spacing of 1200 mm. Cable tray widths to be
as indicated by manufacturer and allowing for 10 to 15 % spare
capacity for future additional cables.
I. The cable trays may either be run horizontally and supported from the
ceiling, or cantilever wall brackets or supported directly on top of
cantilever brackets or mounted vertically as required. Fixing will such

that there will be no perceptible deflection on the ladder when all
cables are in position. A safety factor of 1.6 shall be considered during
design of the ladder such that, with a uniformly distributed load of 120
kg/m, the ladder can take a point load of 100kg at a middle span
without deformation
J. All bends junctions, reducer units and sets shall be factory made.
K. Joints shall be made using proprietary jointing pieces using M6 nut, bolts
and washers
2.2. LADDER RACK
A. Ladder rack shall be supplied and installed in the locations indicated on

the contract drawings. Ladder rack shall be manufactured from MS hot
dipped galvanized to IEC 61537 and capable of carrying cables in a
single layer formation with a minimum deflection of 14mm (between
supports) when the rack is fully loaded.
B. Ladder rack, unless otherwise stated, shall be of medium duty, with

substantial wide walls having a minimum height of 75mm.
C. Ladder rack shall be complete with factory manufactured bends,

reducer units, tees, etc. straight lengths being manufactured in 3m
sections. Rungs shall be spaced at 300mm centers unless otherwise
stated and have 7mm x 20mm slots at 25mm centers.
D. Lengths shall be joined by solid plate connectors, using M6 nuts washers

and bolts or a similar approved method.
E. Supports shall be provided by either purpose made suspension units

(8mm thread rod) or Unirack type as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. CABLE TRAY & LADDER RACK
A. Each section of cable tray and ladder rack shall be capable of carrying
without undue deflection, the total weight of cables that can be
accommodated on the support system and be complete with couplers,
bends, sets, tees etc. including earth continuity links to form a
comprehensive installation.
B. Where the supported cables turn in either vertical or horizontal direction,

manufactured bends or sets shall be provided in order that a continuous
cable tray or ladder rack support is provided throughout the length of
run.
C. Joints shall be factory formed bolting together each section with

mushroom head steel reefing bolts complying with IEC 320 C14. Where
cut sections are unavoidable, they shall be free from sharp edges and
jointed using fish plates and bolts as above.
D. The tray and ladder rack layouts indicated on the drawings show the
main routes as the minimum requirement. Any additional trays or ladder
rack deemed necessary to complete the works shall be shown on the
installation drawings prepared and submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The approval of any such additional trays and ladder racks
will be at the discretion of the Engineer. Any additional support systems
shown shall be at no extra cost to the contract as they will be deemed
to be in the place of clipped cables which would have been allowed
for in order to provide for a complete cabling system.
E. Cable trays and ladder rack shall be coupled by means of rigid edge
bars, fishplates, couplers, mushroom head screws, nuts and shake proof
washers through the flanges, onto the tray / rack where cables are to
be laid. Screws, nuts and washers shall be cadmium plated.
F. Effective continuity between sections of trays and ladder rack shall be

ensured by separate copper bonding strips bolted across each
coupling point. The contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned prior
to bonding.
G. Cable tray and ladder rack for horizontal runs suspended from the
ceiling shall be installed with the flanges facing upwards, and the system
shall be supported with purpose made mild steel trapeze straps or
brackets at sufficient centers to prevent the tray or rack from sagging
and shall provide an overall rigid construction.
H. Where space allows horizontal cable tray / ladder rack routes shall be

suspended from the soffit on drop rods and support brackets at a height
which shall allow cables to be laid on top of the tray / rack.
I. Cables shall be supported over their entire length and evenly distributed
across the width of the tray /rack.
J. Cable tray and ladder rack fixed to walls or ceiling soffits shall be
installed with the flange outwards or downwards respectively and shall
be fixed with an approved fixing with spacing washers such that the tray
/ rack is at least 10mm from the surface of the wall or ceiling.
K. Supply and install all support steelwork and fixings and size the system
capacity to support the designed cable load plus 30% spare capacity.
The maximum tray deflection between the fixings when fully load shall
not be greater than 10mm.
L. Cables shall be secured to the tray system and ladder rack with
proprietary cable cleats or saddles.
M. The complete installation shall be free from burrs and sharp edges.
N. The routing and exact method of installation of cable trays and ladder
racks shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
O. Cables associated with telephones, data, radio and television systems

shall not be run on a common tray with any other services unless
specified otherwise.
A. Identify the route of all primary and secondary cable tray and ladder
rack systems on the as -installed
Record Drawings. This shall include all invert levels, sizes, dimensions and
reducer connections.
B. Include manufacturers published data on cable tray and ladder rack

systems within the O&M Manuals.

SECTION 26 06 50 – SCHEDULES OF LIGHTING
Schedule of Lighting Section 26 05 50 - 0

SECTION 26 06 50
SCHEDULES OF LIGHTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................... 1

PART 1 | 2
1.1. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULES .................................................................................................. 2

SECTION 26 06 50 SCHEDULES OF LIGHTING
PART 1 |
1.1. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULES
A. The following luminaires are selected as the basis of design. Refer also to lighting
plan.
B. The MEP contractor is to provide all wiring boxes, ceiling roses etc.
Lux Legend/
Ref Location Level Description W IP Controls Symbol
Service Block 2 x 20W CFL
Toilet CELING LIGHT,
220 -240V, 50Hz,
Service Block
D1 E27 SURFACE 2x
Kitchen 20 Manual
MOUNTED, 20W
Laundry
DIAMETER 250 x
100mm.,
Storages
CHROME BODY
Villa Toilets 17W LED

Villa Kitchens DOWNLIGHT 220 -
D2 240V, 50Hz, 17W 20 Manual
Lobby
SURFACE
Corridors MOUNTED
Lux Legend/
Ref Location Level Description W IP Controls Symbol
22W LED, 220 -

Villa Bedrooms
240V, 50Hz,
RECESSED
DOWNLIGHT,
D3 22W 20 Manual
3000°K
IN ALUMINUM
HOUSING WITH
Villa Living OPAL DIFFUSER
Rooms

13W LED
WEATHER PROOF
DOWNLIGHT, 220
- 240V, 50Hz
D4 Parking 13W 65 LCP
CEILING
RECESSED, 36
DEGREE, WARM
WHITE, IP65
Lux
Ref Location Level Description W Legend/
IP Controls Symbol
6W LED BULB, E27

BASE, 220-
240V,50Hz
4000°K, IN UV
Outdoor RESISTANT PMMA 6W 65 LCP
GLOBE DIFFUSER
OPAL IN COLOR,
ON
WHITE ARM BASE
Lux
Ref Location Level Description W Legend/
IP Controls Symbol
Outdoor 26W COMPACT
FLUORESCENT
LAMPS IN
BOLLARD 26W 65 LCP
Parking FITTINGS, 220 -
240V, 50Hz,
30000K, CRI > 80

2 x 18W T8 LED
TUBE, 220 - 240V,
50Hz, IN
POLYCARBONATE 2 x
Outdoor 20 Manual
HOUSING AND 18W
POLYCARBONATE
PRISMATIC
DIFFUSER, IP65
6W LED BULB, E27

BASE, 220 - 240V,
50Hz 4000°K, IN
UV
Outdoor RESISTANT PMMA 6W 65 LCP
GLOBE COVER
OPAL IN COLOR,
ON WHITE ARM
BASE
ALL PROPOSED AND ALTERNATIVE LUMINAIRES ARE SUBJECT
TO INTERIOR DESIGN ARCHITECT’S APPROVAL. CONTRACTOR
TO PROVIDE DETAILED MANUFACTURER’S CUTSHEET OF EACH
LUMINAIRE ALONG WITH THE SAMPLES FOR ENGINEER AND ID
NOTE:
ARCHITECT APPROVAL. ENSURE THAT ALL ALTERNATIVE
PRODUCTS WILL MATCH OR EXCEED WITH THE PROPOSED
LIGHTING IN TERMS STANDARD AND QUALITY. MUST ATTAIN
THE REQUIRED LUX LEVEL IN EACH ROOM.

SECTION 26 06 99 - SCHEDULES OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

SECTION 26 06 99
SCHEDULES OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................1
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................5
3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................5
Schedule of Approved Manufacturer Section 26 06 99 - 0

SECTION 26 06 99 - SCHEDULES OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
PART 1 | GENERAL
A. This section includes the approved schedule of manufacturers for all

products specified within Division 26 Electrical Systems section of this
specification.
B. Please refer to the relevant equipment schedule drawings for model

selections and performance requirements.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
A. All products supplied and installed by the Contractor shall be

manufactured by the approved companies from the country of origin
specified in the schedule below.
Acceptable
Manufacturer/ Country of
Item Product
Origin
Sub-Contractor
260519 Low-Voltage
Electrical Power
Conductor and
Cables
260519.1 Flexible Heat Resistant Ducab UAE

Cables for
Prysmian Italy
Lighting
Tekab UAE
260519.2 Flexible Cables for Eupen Belgium

Motors
Pirelli Italy
260519.3 Power Cables (XLPE, Ducab UAE

LSF)
Prysmian Italy
Riyadh Cables KSA
Saudi Cables KSA
260519.4 Fire Resistant Cables BICC UK

Cavicel Italy

Draka UK
Prysmian Italy
260519.6 Cable Lugs & Glands BICC UK

CMP UK
Delta UK
Hawke UK
260519.7 Wires in Conduits & Ducab UAE

Trunking (LSF)
Prysmian Italy
Riyadh Cables KSA
Saudi Cables KSA
260526 Grounding and AN Wallis UK

Bonding for Electrical Erico UK
Furse
System UK
260529 Hangers and Support As Cable Tray & Trunking

for Electrical System Supplier
260533 Raceway and Boxes Barton UK

for Electrical Systems
Delta UAE
(Galvanized)
Fitter & Poulton UK
Lanric Malaysia
260533 Raceway and Boxes Comat UAE

Decoduct UAE
Embedded Conduits
in concrete (PVC) Egatube KSA
Lanric Malaysia
Marshall Tufflex UK
260533 Raceway and Boxes Adaptaflex UK

Barton UK
(Flexible Metallic
Conduits & Kopex UK
Accessories) Lanric Malaysia
260533 Cable Trunking Delta UAE

(Galvanized)
Lanric Malaysia
Legrand France
OBO Betterman Germany
Wibe France

260536 Cable Tray/Ladder Barton UK

Rack
Cablofill UK
Delta UAE
Lanric Malaysia
Legrand Europe
Obo Betterman Germany
Unistrut UK
Wibe France
260923 Lighting Control ABB Germany

Devices
Dynalite Australia
Legrand France
Honeywell US
Siemens Germany
Schneider France
262116 Low-Voltage Decoduct UAE

Underground
Marshall Tufflex UK
Electrical
Multiplast UAE
Service Entrance
262413.1 Switchboard ABB Germany

components
Klockner Moeller Germany
ACB’s
Merlin Gerin / Schneider France
MCCB’s
Siemens Germany
MCB’s/RCD’s
262413.2 Local Switchboard ABB Dubai

Assembler
Arabian Gulf Switchgear Sharjah
Juma Al Majid Dubai
Voltage Electric Sharjah
Scientechnic Dubai
262414 Sub-main Low As main switchboard

Voltage Electrical suppliers/assembler
262416 Panelboards As main switchboard

suppliers/assembler
262419 Motor-Control As main switchboard

Centers suppliers/assembler

262419.1 Contactors/Relays ABB Germany

Allen Bradley USA
Telemecanique France
262419.2 Variable Frequency ABB Germany

Drnes/Soft Starters
Allen Bradley US
Moeller Germany
Siemens Germany
Telemecanique France
262419.3 Energy Meters (BMS) Honeywell US

Invensys UK
Johnson Controls US
Siemens Germany
262419.4 Isolators & Lock Off ABB Germany

Stop Buttons
Crabtree Australia
Craig & Derricott UK
MEM / Eaton UK
Elektra Germany
Merlin Gerin France
262726 Wiring Devices
262726.1 General Accessories – ABB Germany

Service Areas
Crabtree UK
(Metalclad)
Legrand France
MEM UK
MK UK

Back of House (White
Crabtree UK
Plastic)
Legrand France
MEM UK
MK UK

Public Areas
Crabtree UK
(Satin Stainless Steel)
Legrand France

MEM UK
MK UK
262726.4 Industrial Socket Legrand France

Outlet
Lewden UK
MEM UK
MK UK
262726.5 Junction Boxes, Ashley UK

ceiling roses etc.
Legrand France
MK UK
262773 Door Chimes Legrand France

MK UK
262816 Enclosed Switches As main Switchboard

and Circuit Breaker supplier
263523 Electromagnetic- Obo Betterman US/UK

Interference Filter
Tyco Germany
WJ Furse Italy
264113 Lightning Protection AN Wallis US

for Structures
Erico France
Franklin UK
WJ Furse
265100 Interior Lighting
265100.1 Luminaires
265100.2 Lamps
265200 Emergency Lighting CEAG Germany
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. All products shall be provided by the companies detailed in the above

table and shall be installed in accordance with the approved
Manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHT CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHT CONTROL DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.3. WORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................1
1.4. EXTENT OF WORKS ....................................................................................................2
1.5. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................3
1.6. SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................4
1.7. QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................4
1.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..........................................................4
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................5
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................5
2.2. EMERGENCY LIGHTING TEST FACILITY .....................................................................6
2.3. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS ..........................................................6
2.4. DEVICES TO BE CONTROLLED ..................................................................................6
2.5. AUTOMATED FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................7
2.6. HARDWARE PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................8
2.7. SYSTEM INTEGRATION ...............................................................................................9
2.8. FIRE ALARM / EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS......................................................9
2.9. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (NOT APPLICABLE) ...........................................9
2.10. SECURITY ....................................................................................................................9
2.11. MULTI-LEVEL PHOTO-ELECTRIC CELL PROCESSING ................................................9
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................9
3.1. COMMISSIONING AND PROGRAMMING ...............................................................9
Lighting Control Devices Section 26 09 23- 0

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHT CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 | GENERAL
This section of the specification includes the following sub-section

heading:
Lighting Control System
Lighting Control Panels
Lighting Control Devices

best International Standards and Codes of Practice, with the current
issue of IEC 60364 and the requirements of the Local Supply Authority.

the relevant International Electrical Codes and International Standards
and requirements of the Local Supply Authority.
C. The system and system components shall comply with:
IEC 61347 – Lamp Control gear particular requirements
IEC 60929 – AC and/or DC-supplied electronic control gear –

Performance requirements
IEC 62386 – Digital Addressable Lighting Interface – General

Requirements

The Contractor shall provide a schedule identifying all differences for

1.3. WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall employ a specialist lighting control supplier to

develop the design and provide a networked lighting control system in
accordance with the required performance specified hereon.

B. The Lighting control specialist supplier shall provide a networked lighting

control system with associated panels to incorporate all areas listed
below and on front of house areas identified in the ID
Lighting drawings, specifications and control schedules.
C. A single source specialist supplier will provide all labor, materials,

products, equipment and services to develop, supply and install the
lighting control and dimming systems as indicated on the drawings and
specified in these specifications, to provide a complete and operational
installation.
1.4. EXTENT OF WORKS
A. This tender is related to the works required for the lighting control
associated with:
All areas/rooms – Switched
Landscape/External areas/Car Park - Lighting Control Panel
B. Luminaires in apartment lift lobbies to be circuited such that a mix of

fixture types are switched separately by timeclock and PIR. When
presence is detected in the corridor, lighting will be brought on
according to time of day. A 10-minute delay timer will keep lighting on
for ten minutes after last detection. (NOT APPLICABLE)
C. Luminaires in tower staircases to be wired alternately on each half

landing and PIR controlled. The system will allow flexibility to programme
50% of lighting to be on 24/7. When presence is detected in the stair, the
remaining 50% of lighting will be brought on. A 10-minute delay timer will
keep lighting on for ten minutes after last detection. An arrangement of
wall mounted PIRs to be provided on half landings facing doors into stair
with coverage pattern such that the PIR detects movement on the
landing above and the landing below and triggers the signal to switch
on the stair lights. (NOT APPLICABLE)
D. Lighting in plant rooms to be PIR controlled. When presence is detected

in a space, the lighting will be brought on. A 10-minute delay timer will
keep lighting on for ten minutes after last detection. The PIR sensor will

be located to suit the spacing. An arrangement of ceiling mounted PIRs

to be provided with suitable coverage pattern to detect personnel
within the plant space. (NOT APPLICABLE)
E. Luminaires in car park will be wired alternately on the driveway such that
alternate lighting fixtures can be switched separately to allow 50%
lighting on driveways. In addition to this, additional lighting is provided
to the parking bays, hence 50% or 100% of lighting on driveways can be
switched on or off separately from the parking bay fixtures. Each lighting
group will be time-controlled. Designated areas of the car park may be
allocated to retail or to apartments, different time settings may be
allocated to these zones such that they are controlled for different
operating periods. (NOT APPLICABLE)
F. Front of House areas including landscapes, reception, Swimming pool

deck, gym and facade. Provision of lighting control is required to
incorporate all ID Lighting requirements and controls. A central clock
and photo sensor will be arranged to ensure lighting is brought on
automatically within the time zones that it is required. (NOT APPLICABLE)
1.5. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall include for coordination with all Sections as

necessary to complete the works via the submittal process. This shall
include full coordination with:
88 All luminaire manufacturers: integration of luminaires, ballasts,

drivers and control of fixtures to suit the design intent and
control/dimming strategy.
89 Emergency lighting supplier to integrate any requirements to

maintain life safety code practices Specialist Contractor to
coordinate with the Electrical contractor prior to submission to
confirm all required power supplies. Main Contractor will insure
that required power supplies are included in their Tender
Submission.
90 Specialist Contractor to coordinate with the SCS supplier/installer

prior to submission to confirm all required outlets. Main Contractor

will insure that required RJ45 outlets are included in their Tender
Submission.
91 The specialist Lighting control supplier/installer shall coordinate

with and report to the Master System Integrator to coordinate
required RJ45 network requirements, connectivity, cabinet space
and required throughput/Quality of Service.
1.6. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalogue which include all

technical details, features, schematic diagrams, interface units,
electrical ratings, protections etc.
B. Drawings: Provide detailed drawings for the Lighting/Dimmer panel

structure to indicate the configuration of all components of dimmer
modules, switching modules breakers, termination, interface ports etc.
C. Show all BOH and ID Specialist Architectural lighting requirements and

control circuits on contractors shop drawings, allowing the required
power supplies to run through the lighting control panels.
D. Lighting Control strategy report including proposed switching schedules

and times
E. Test Reports: Provide the factory test results in a comprehensive report.
1.7. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier must have ISO 9001
B. Source Limitations: Obtain complete lighting control components

through one source from a single manufacturer. Products manufactured
by multi vendors are not accepted. Products offered must be
assembled & manufactured at factory with the highest quality
standards.
1.8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prior to any testing commencing the contractor shall submit as-built

drawings based on approved
B. Shop drawings, O&M manuals and a list of components data sheets/

relevant catalogues extracts.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. A simple lighting control system will be deployed for the

Landscape/External areas/Car Park.
B. Lighting control panels will contain a din-rail-mounted lighting control

contactor operated either by the central timeclock signal (from BMS) or
local PIR.
C. A control bus cable will loop from the BMS interface point to each
lighting control panel and operate the appropriate control contactor
according to time schedule – generally set-back during pre-defined off-
peak hours. (NOT APPLICABLE)
D. The BMS will have the facility to re-define the set-back times according
to time of year e.g. during Ramadan when active hours are extended.
(NOT APPLICABLE)
E. All control panels provided throughout the project for the individual
areas shall be provided from a single manufacturer.
F. The apartment corridors and tower stair cases will be locally PIR
controlled. Sensors will be wired back of the local control panel where
contactors will accept the signal to switch the lights in corridors and
stairs. At off-peak times, a central timeclock signal will switch the corridor
lighting to partial lighting levels by switching off one or two circuits along
the corridors. (NOT APPLICABLE)
G. External lighting will be controlled according to day lighting levels

(photo cell) and time.
H. The car park lighting will be controlled via the lighting control system
allocating lighting levels by switching according to time of day.
I. Daylight sensors and movement sensors shall be provided as necessary

to restrict the operation of Lighting circuits when adequate daylight is
available.

J. The system shall:
92 distribute central switching signal from BMS according to

available daylight (photo sensor) and time (timeclock).
93 accept local PIR sensor signals where appropriate.
94 have local override switch in lighting control panel.
K. The system will cover the whole area lighting requirement.
2.2. EMERGENCY LIGHTING TEST FACILITY
A. Emergency lighting is fully independent of the controlled lighting circuits

hence will function separately.
2.3. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. The lighting control panels will be configured exactly the same across
similar areas. There will be one multi-pole contactor activated by
timeclock, one by PIR and one (if any) by photocell. The same signal will
be provided to each area i.e. all apartment floors will be switched to
lower lighting level for same time periods. The car park lighting will have
a separate control signal to allow a separate time period to be
allocated.
B. The switching modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of either 2 or

4 individually programmable integral relays.
C. The module shall be equipped with 20A mechanically-latched relays,

which, in the event of failure, remain in their last state and may be
manually operated on and off from the module.
2.4. DEVICES TO BE CONTROLLED
A. Lighting load types
95 Lamp and gear types
The following lamp and gear types may be installed in the project and
shall be controlled from the system:
a LED luminaires (white and RGB)
b Tungsten halogen (mains voltage)

c Low voltage <24V (tungsten halogen / xenon) with

magnetic wire wound transformer
d Low voltage <24V (tungsten halogen / xenon) with

electronic transformer
e Tungsten filament (mains voltage)
f Linear fluorescent with electronic ballast
g Compact fluorescent with electronic ballast
h High intensity discharge with electronic ballast
i Cold cathode with electronic ballast
j Light Emitting Diode with electronic driver
96 Controlled power requirements
The following forms of power control shall be utilized to match the loads
above:
a Switched power
97 Note: Some luminaries shall be fed with constant power which is

not switched by the Lighting Control System. The Lighting Control
System may be required, however, to provide control signal to
these units as below. Other luminaries will require switched power
as well as control signal. Refer also to the lighting specialist
consultant documentation, specification and logical control
channel schedule.
2.5. AUTOMATED FUNCTIONS
A. Daylight Monitoring
98 The supplier shall provide sensors and interfaces to allow for the
recall of lighting scenes in reaction to external daylight levels. This
particularly applies to external lighting, car park lighting, etc.
B. Presence Sensing
99 The supplier shall provide presence sensors and interfacing to

allow for the recall of any given scene in any given area by the

triggering of a passive infra-red sensor. The system shall allow for

the configuration of “stay-on” times as required by the Engineer.
C. Time and Date Operations
100 The system shall provide time and date functions, including
automatic time clock, through a dedicated time clock unit or
through functionality provided through the central PC. The time
clock component shall be capable of automatically recalling
any given scene in any given area at any given time, with
differentiation between different days of the week. It should also
be possible for the end user to suspend timed operations by
manual override. The component shall automatically adjust for
daylight saving time according to EU directive 2000/84/EC
2.6. HARDWARE PERFORMANCE
A. Technical Standards
101 All items of equipment shall conform to the relevant local and
European Norms, be CE certified and shall be manufactured and
installed in accordance with the latest edition of the IEE
Regulations.
102 All equipment shall meet the RFI suppression requirements of EN

55 015. The system should also meet the RFI immunity
requirements of IEC 61547. Items of equipment whose function
makes them subject to EN 55 103 must also comply with that
standard.
103 All equipment shall comply with all the requirements of the local
supply authority.
B. Electricity Supply
104 All mains voltage equipment shall be suitable for operation on a

230/400 Volt, single / 3- Phase, 50Hz supply and shall be capable
of operating normally on phase voltages between 200V and
250V. All extra low voltage equipment shall operate on a
maximum of 24V dc.

105 In the event of communication failure from BMS, the lighting will
revert to ON.
C. Operational Conditions
106 All items shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures

up to 50 degrees C, 100% RH with no degradation in
performance.
2.7. SYSTEM INTEGRATION
The lighting management system shall integrate with other building

systems as follows:
2.8. FIRE ALARM / EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS
a The lighting management system shall integrate with the

fire alarm system such that all lighting is automatically
switched on in the event of the fire alarm sounding –
therefore the BMS signal may be “broken” to revert the
lighting to ON.
2.9. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (NOT APPLICABLE)
a. The lighting control system will take signals from the BMS –
photocell and timeclock. The BMS will deliver common ON/OFF
signals to multiple switching contactors.
2.10. SECURITY
a. There is no interface between lighting control and security.
2.11. MULTI-LEVEL PHOTO-ELECTRIC CELL PROCESSING
A. The sensor will be provided as part of the BMS. The signal will be taken to
appropriate lighting control panels as required.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. COMMISSIONING AND PROGRAMMING
A. Commissioning and contractor support
107 The supplier’s documentation shall clearly indicate the expected

scope of work of both the vendor and the supplier in this process

and the allowances of the Engineer / technician time included in

the scope of the quotation.
A. Programming and Designer support (NOT APPLICABLE)
108 Liaise with the BMS supplier to ensure signals are distributed
according to each space’s requirements.

SECTION 26 21 16 LOW-VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE

ENTRANCE

SECTION 26 21 16
LOW-VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 |GENERAL ...................................................................................................................1

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................1
PART 2 |PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................1
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................2
2.2. CABLE DUCTS AND CONDUITS ................................................................................2
2.3. CABLE MARKERS .......................................................................................................2
2.4. CABLE TILES & TAPE ...................................................................................................3
2.5. CABLES .......................................................................................................................3
PART 3 |EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3
3.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................3
3.2. CABLE TRENCHES ......................................................................................................3
3.3. CABLE DUCTS & CONDUITS ......................................................................................5
3.4. CABLE MARKERS .......................................................................................................6
3.5. RECORD INFORMATION ...........................................................................................6
Low Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance Section 26 09 23 -0

SECTION 26 21 16 - LOW-VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 | GENERAL
This section of the specification includes the following sub-section

heading: Cable Duct work
Builders work
Firestopping

best International Standards and odes of Practice, the IEC 60364 and
specifically in accordance with the Local Supply Authority requirements.
B. In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

most stringent shall be included. The Contractor shall provide a schedule
1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The excavation and backfilling of trenches, provision of sifted sand and

buried cable conduits shall be carried out and arranged by the main
Contractor, but designed and paid for under the Division 16 trade.
B. Include for the preparation of detailed drawings to identify trenching

requirements and the actual execution of all necessary excavations,
backfilling of cable trenches and the provision of cable ducts,
manholes, inspection chambers etc.
C. Services covered shall include buried HV and LV cables, incoming and

distributed telecommunications cables, networked services such as fire
alarm systems and BMS systems and public address systems.
D. Provide dedicated ducting for individual services. Under no

circumstances shall HV, LV or ELV cabled Services share the same duct
or buried conduit.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL
A. All products used shall be of the highest quality and suitable for the use
to which it is being applied. All products used shall be acceptable to the
local authority requirements.
2.2. CABLE DUCTS AND CONDUITS
A. The Contract shall include for the supply and installation of all cast iron
(C.I.) pipes, earthenware (E.W.) ducts and unplasticised
polyvinylchloride (UPVC) conduits where specifically indicated in the
following detail Specification Sections and/or attached drawings in
accordance with the following items.
B. All cable ducts and conduits shall be single way and each duct shall be
either 100mm or 150mm diameter, ELV/LV - 100mm diameter for up to
50mm sq. cable, 150mm diameter for HV and larger cables.
C. Earthenware ducts shall be of the self-aligning flexible sleeved jointed

type manufactured in accordance with the tolerances, permeability
and strength requirements to the relevant BS Defining super strength
quality having a 100mm bore, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
Drain pipes shall not be permitted.
D. Unless otherwise noted all ducts used shall be high density PVC type,
installed in trench complete with all protective covering and markings.
2.3. CABLE MARKERS
A. Include for the supply and installation of suitable concrete cable

markers to ensure that the route of all external HV, LV and
communications underground cables are permanently indicated.
B. In unmade ground markers shall be smooth concrete posts 600mm long,

sunk into the ground to a depth of 300mm.
C. Cable markers shall be complete with suitable plastic inserts, to denote

the voltage, reference and installed depth of cable in Arabic and
English.
D. The type and finalized locations of the cable markers shall be agreed

with the Engineer before any orders for the units are placed. HV cable
markers shall be the cable tile type incorporating a warning and caution
stating the voltage present.
2.4. CABLE TILES & TAPE
A. Include for the supply and installation of the cable tiles/identification

tape and the cables and to supervise the backfilling and correct
protection of the cables to suit the layout of draw-in points and/or cable
routes.
2.5. CABLES
A. All cables used shall be as defined under the relevant specification

section.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. The overall external service facilities shall be provided and installed in

accordance with manufacturers requirements to allow the installation
of the electrical services as specified.
3.2. CABLE TRENCHES
A. The trenches shall be excavated to provide a minimum cover of 750mm

and where more than one cable is laid in the trench, the cables shall be
spaced at the following minimum dimensions:
CABLE HV LV GAS & COMMS HOT

WATER SERVICES
H 150mm 300mm 600mm 600mm 800mm

V
300mm 80mm 600mm 300mm 800mm
LV
B. 600mm
Cable trenches 600mm for minimum
shall be excavated 300mm cable depths,
50mm spacing
800mm
Alarms
&
between services and trench widths as indicated below:
com
ms

Type of Cable General Traffic Roads Areas Cultivated Areas

Conditions
Drains Beneath
(Minimum)
Road lighting 500mm 750mm to top of ducts 600mm 1.0m

Communicati
500mm 750mm to top of ducts 600mm 1.0m
on Alarm
Low Voltage
High Voltage
900mm 1.0m to top of ducts 1.0m 1.0m
Extra high
voltage 900mm 1.0m to top of ducts 1.0m 1.0m
C. The width of cable trenches for required depths: -
Nominal Depth Nominal Width

Down to 500mm 300mm
Down to 800mm
500mm
Down to 1.0m
500mm
D. Down
The to 1.5m
width of cable trenches given above is for one cable. The width shall
Below 1.5m
be increased 700mm
using all the above tables for more than one cable.
E. 800mm
Detail drawings and a programme of trenching, cable laying, jointing
and backfilling shall be prepared and submitted for the approval of the
Engineer before any work is carried out on site.
F. All drains or other service pipes damaged due to the excavation work
shall be repaired and/or replaced and all necessary precautions shall
be taken under this Contract to ensure that the existing services are
maintained and are not damaged. The Engineer shall be advised
immediately of any service pipe, duct or cable which has been
damaged during the excavation work and replaced or repaired under
this Contract.
G. All necessary costs for providing timber shoring for the trenches, for
keeping the trenches free from water, the required protection of open
or unguarded trenches and for ensuring that there is no land slip or fall,
or consequential damage to adjacent works or buildings, shall be
included in this Contract.
H. The backfilling and reinstatement of the trenches shall be carried out in

150mm layers and hand ramming the first two layers, power ramming
being used for all remaining layers.
3.3. CABLE DUCTS & CONDUITS
A. Trenches for ducts shall be scooped out at all points where the sockets
rest, so that the body of the duct lies upon solid ground. In rocky soils a
layer of loose sand shall be spread over the bottom of the trench and
rammed to afford a bedding for the ducts. In water-logged or unstable
ground, a foundation for the ducts shall be provided by laying 75mm of
concrete using 18mm aggregate, followed by 100mm of sand on top of
the concrete. Ducts shall be cut as necessary.
B. UPVC conduits shall be laid on and surrounded with concrete to provide

a minimum cover of 150mm above and below and 100mm on either
side of collars. The concrete shall be mixed in the following proportions:
Cement 0.0508 tons
Fine aggregate 0.0778 cu.m in dry loose state
Or Coarse aggregate 0.0917 cu.m in damp loose state, 0.184 cu.m

(nominal max size 37.5mm).
C. Ducts shall be kept clear of gas or water pipes, drains, sewers or

electrical plant. In order to allow the use of 'tamping' machine on gas
and water mains that may be adjacent, at least 300mm clearance shall
be given wherever possible. This clearance also shall be given to other
ser vices. Where services cross, the minimum clearance shall be 100mm.
D. Ducts shall be laid so as to provide the minimum cover over, and

spacing as specified in the associated cable clauses of this Specification
Section.
E. To prove the alignment of the 100mm ducts a wooden mandrel 1.50m

long and 92mm diameter shall be drawn through as the ducts are laid,
but where a set has to be given to the line of duct, the wooden mandrel
shall be replaced by an iron mandrel 250mm long and 92mm diameter.
F. If it is necessary to deflect from a straight or to vary the depth, as in

passing from footway to carriageway, or vice-versa, or in entering an
underground chamber, a lateral set not exceeding 25mm in a length of

1.50m may be given to the joints, but the deflection must be small
enough to pass the reflection tests.
G. Alignment tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer and
if any obstruction or other defect is discovered, it shall be rectified
forthwith to his satisfaction. Wooden plugs shall be inserted at the ends
of each section of duct until the length has been tested and passed.
H. Ducts shall be cleared with a mandrel, not smaller than the internal
diameter of the duct, followed by a circular wire brush 12.5 mm greater
in diameter than the duct, before any cables are drawn in.
I. Spare ducts shall be cleared and tested as above and then sealed.
J. The cable and exposed duct end shall be lapped with plastic tape
which shall be rendered with mastic to form a water, fire and gas tight
barrier. Asbestos shall not be used for this purpose.
K. Nylon draw rope shall be provided throughout.
3.4. CABLE MARKERS
A. The markers shall be installed at the point where the particular cable
leaves a building, feeder pillar or other current controlling device and
at points located at approximately 10.0m intervals along the route and
2.0m from any deviation from the route.
B. Each change in direction in cable route shall be indicated by additional

markers and all markers shall be installed level with the finished surface
of the ground and shall measure not less than 250mm x 250mm.
A. Show exact location and invert level of all buried services and ducting
systems on a coordinated set of Record Drawings.

SECTION 26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS

SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.2. RELATED SECTIONS: ...................................................................................................1
1.5. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................3
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................4
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................4
2.2. DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ..............................................................................................5
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................7
3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................7
3.2. TESTING & COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................7
3.3. POST COMMISSIONING ..........................................................................................10
Panel Boards Section 26 41 16- 0

SECTION 26 24 16 – PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
B. Panelboards and accessories
1.2. RELATED SECTIONS:
26-2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
26-3623 Automatic Transfer Switch
26-2419 Motor Control Centers
26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26-0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26-0573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26-2713 Metering

current issue of IEC 60364, IET Regulations (BS 7671) and the requirements
of the Local Supply Authority.

the relevant International Electrical Codes and International Standards
and requirements of the Local Supply Authority.
IEC 60038 – IEC Standard Voltages
IEC 60364 – Low Voltage Electrical installations
IEC 61439 – Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60947 – Standards for low-voltage switchgear and control gear

IEC 61643 – Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power

distribution systems
IEC 61643 – Low-voltage surge protective devices
IEC 60755 – General requirements for residual current operated

protective devices
IEC 61140 – Protection against electric shocks - common aspects for

installation and equipment
IEC 60664 – Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage

systems
IEC 60715 – Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC 60898 – Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for households

and similar installations
IEC 60255 – Measuring relays and protection equipment - Common

requirements
IEC 60146 – Semiconductor converters
IEC 60269 – Low-voltage fuses - General requirements
IEC 60529 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
BS 7671 – IET Electrical Wiring Regulations

most stringent shall be applied for costing purposes; the Engineer shall
determine the required allowance.
E. Local Code and Statutory Requirements will take precedence.
A. The Panelboards (FDBs) and shall be suitable and fit for purpose for
operation in the identified environment shown on the schematic/layout
drawings and as specific requirements stated in the Scope of Works
section of this specification.
B. This Specification covers the general requirements for design,

manufacture, testing and supply of Panelboards covering the

requirements for Final Distribution Boards (FDBs).
C. The Contractor shall install the switchgear as shown in the drawings and
in full compliance to this specification, the international standards
specified in the following section & the local authority regulations. In
case of difference between this specification and the specified
international standards and the local authority regulations, the more
stringent requirements in compliance with local authority regulations
shall prevail.
D. The Contractor shall employ the switchgear device manufacturer to

provide a comprehensive discrimination study of the proposed
distribution system and final selected loads, to identify, verify and report
all required protection device settings.
E. The Contractor shall comply with all MEP Preliminary - General

Requirements including work practices, general submittals,
commissioning, warrantees, etc.
1.5. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the supply, installation and commissioning stage of main low

voltage panelboards with the following:
109 Local supply authority for provision of installation, incoming

cables and required meters.
110 BMS vendor for status monitoring/control of all main breakers,

changeover devices and digital in/out signals for digital multi-
meters. Coordinated for all load shedding allowances including
time delays as specified. (NOT APPLICABLE)
111 Delivery, Access and Maintenance Strategist e.g. lifting eyes,

modular requirements and removable panels.
112 Maintain required workspace clearances including required door

swings /panel openings to allow for maintenance access and
equipment replacement.
113 Maintain required cable/busbar bending radius between

containment system and panel entry to comply with

manufacturers literature and good practice guidelines.
114 Cable busbar terminals/connectors to be purposely

manufactured to allow multiple parallel cable connections to
incoming or outgoing terminals where indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. All Panelboards / Final Distribution Boards (FDBs), MCBs, fuses and

isolators shall be of one manufacturer for the whole of the works.
B. Unless otherwise noted on the schematics all distribution boards (DBs)

shall incorporate MCB/RCD protection and shall comply with IEC 61439-
3
C. All distribution boards shall have an integral means of isolation from the
incoming power supply.
D. Distribution boards shall be configured to provide Residual Current

Device protection to groups of MCBs in accordance with the local
authority requirements.
E. Where earth leakage sensing is indicated, provide either dry contacts

for BMS connection, audio- visual indication (for manned areas), visual
indication (for unmanned areas) or a combination of either. For devices
serving essential services such as fire/voice alarm panels, emergency
lighting cubicles, fire dampers, fire pumps, sprinkler pumps, sewage
pumps etc. provide alarm annunciation for each circuit served.
F. Provide earth leakage sensing with shunt-trip device to operate

moulded case circuit breaker for each A/C chiller or similar large load.
G. Circuits serving A/C plant shall be provided with under-voltage relays to

automatically isolate the circuit when the declared voltage drops
below 75% of its nominal value. This shall be within 0.1 seconds. Auto-
reset of the circuit shall be via an adjustable timer, with settings between
5-10 minutes.
H. Unless otherwise detailed the spare capacity available upon

completion shall be 25% (25% spares of each rating used).
2.2. DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. All terminals shall be readily accessible from the front of the distribution
board.
B. MCB distribution boards shall comply with IEC61439-3 'Particular

Requirements for Miniature Circuit Breaker Boards'.
C. Include for each distribution board to be of the size and type as detailed
in the Specification Sections, and to fully comply with IEC61439-3 for
those incorporating MCB units.
D. Each unit shall be of the 500-volt pattern as a minimum requirement and

be complete with a pressed or fabricated steel case manufactured
from sheet steel having a minimum thickness of 1.7mm.
E. Hinged doors shall be provided and shall be complete with a catch and
key operated lock.
F. All live terminals or parts shall be shrouded by insulating material to

ensure that it is impossible for any live metal to be touched whilst
withdrawing or replacing the MCB units or fuses.
G. The moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) or miniature circuit breakers

(MCB) and/or earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB) shall be arranged in
banks which shall be easily removable to facilitate wiring and
connection. Adequate non-ferrous bus-bars shall be fitted to the banks
and shall be complete with suitable cast brass terminal for the
termination of the cables. The diameter of each terminal pinching screw
shall be not less than 75% of the diameter of the cable entry hole.
H. Each distribution board shall be complete with an internal ELCB and

MCB circuit chart clearly detailing the circuit numbers, area served and
the respective circuit breaker sizes. The charts shall be type-written,
glued to stiff cardboard, covered with clear perspex and fixed to the
inside face of the door by means of screws and nuts. Where this is not
physically possible the alternative position or details shall be agreed with
the Engineer. In addition to the above the Contractor shall hand over a

master copy of all such schedules in a ring binder.
I. In addition, each circuit chart shall contain full details of the size and
type of cable feeding the distribution board, etc., together with the size,
type and location of the main or sub -main distribution board or rising
busbar serving the board.
J. Circuit and phase colour identification bands shall be fitted to all phase,
neutral, earth and control circuit cables.
K. Distribution boards shall be supplied complete with all outgoing MCBs,

RCDs etc. as specified in the schedule and also be supplied with blank
ways as necessary.
L. Each distribution board shall be new and complete with all necessary
shrouds, carriers, MCCB, ELCB/ELS and MCB units etc., with metal case
stove enameled finished to an approved colour.
M. Where distribution boards are surface mounted, and the installation is

concealed within the walls, the conduits shall be terminated in a suitable
flush adaptable box measuring not less than 300mm x 300mm. The
distribution board shall be mounted over the box and attached to the
box with four brass machine screws into threaded holes at the corner of
the box and in addition shall be securely fixed to the wall with raw bolts
or raw plugs and screws.
N. Final connections between the adaptable box and the distribution

board shall be made via a large square or rectangular hole in the back
of the distribution board. The edges of the hole shall be finished with a
suitable insulating material to ensure that the cables are not pulled over
rough or sharp edges.
O. The insulating material shall be securely fixed to the distribution board

and the adaptable box shall be adequately bonded to the distribution
board by means of a short length of flexible copper tape, bolts, nuts and
shake proof washers.
P. Each neutral bar incorporated in distribution boards shall have the same
number of connections as there are phase connections within the

boards. Each neutral wire connection shall be made in the same order
as the phase wires are connected to the protection units.
Q. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the

respective phase bus-bars.
R. Earth bars shall be provided having the same number of connections as

for the phases and the conductors terminated in a like manner.
S. Where the schematic diagrams indicate a single feed serving two

separate distribution boards (for example lighting and power boards)
include for manufacturing a composite unit with a solid shrouded
copper link between the live side of the board isolators and the
incoming feeder cable.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. The panelboard shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, the specification and any
requirements of the local power supply authority requirements.
B. After installation and levelling, ensure all entries into the panelboard are
insect and rodent proof by means of suitable plates, grouting or screens.
All incoming and outgoing ways shall be sealed prior to completion.
3.2. TESTING & COMMISSIONING
A. Testing Factory Acceptance Tests: Arrange and pay for a standard

factory test of the panelboard prior to shipping to site.
B. The same pre-tests are to be performed on site in the presence of the

Manufacturers technicians, prior to energizing. The results are to be
measured against the factory acceptance tests.
C. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the

following preparations for tests:
1. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full

updating on final system configuration and parameters where they
supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract

Documents.
2. Visual inspection of circuits, device operations, correct identification

and quality.
3. Make insulation resistance tests of panelboard buses, components, and

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits
4. Make continuity of all circuits
5. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of

panelboard to test organization.
C. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:
1. Program Objectives: To assure panelboard installation meets specified

requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, provides
appropriate protection for systems and equipment, and is suitable for
energizing.
2. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare panelboard

for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and these specifications.
3. Schedule tests and notify at least one week in advance of test

commencement
4. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report

defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of
adjustments and remedial efforts.
5. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply

a label to tested components indicating test results, person responsible,
and date.
6. Protective Device calibration certificate, Ratings and Settings; Verify

indicated ratings and settings and make the final system adjustments of
Overcurrent Protection Devices.
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following Inspections

and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and

nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections.
2. Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection

and current transformers meet specified requirements.
3. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and

other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction
manual.
4. Check panelboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit

of components.
5. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque

wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
6. Clean panelboard interior and exterior-using manufacturer's approved

methods and materials.
7. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for

Overcurrent Protective Devices
E. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance

with manufacturer’s instruction:
1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that

disconnect from solid state devices through normal disconnecting
features.
2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
3. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
4. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating

voltage of control power elements including control power transformer
and control power wiring.
5. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.
6. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified for compliance.
7. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and

retest panelboards. Verify by the retests that panelboards meet
specified requirements.

3.3. POST COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Within 2 months of handover of the works, perform an

infrared scan of panelboard bus joints and connections. Open or
remove metal doors, covers, inspection plates, and barriers to make
joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner.
B. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform 2 additional follow-up infrared

scans of the same joints and connections, one 4 months after handover
and one 11 months after award of TOC (Taking over Certificate).
C. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide documentation of device calibration.
D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all

connections checked and describing results of scanning. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and
observations after remedial action.
E. At full building occupancy or 6 months into defects period (whichever

soonest), the Contractor shall test the total harmonic distortion (THD) at
the points of common coupling i.e. each transformer. If the total
harmonic distortion (%) exceeds the Local Authority Allowances, the
Contractor shall employ a specialist harmonic filter supplier/installer to
design, supply install, test and commission passive or active filters to
reduce measured total harmonic distortion within acceptable limits.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of

panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, metal filings
and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the testing of the panelboard during factory tests and

after installation at site. The contractor is to complete all testing and
record results prior to offering a demonstration to the Client/Engineer.
3.6 CLIENT TRAINING

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service

representatives to demonstrate panelboards and train Employer's
maintenance personnel.
3.7 RECORD INFORMATION
A. Provide comprehensive record information for all main panelboards

including wiring diagrams, OEM component details and enclosures.
B. Provide and hang framed protected copies of all related distribution

schematic drawings within each associated Electrical room.

SECTION 26 24 19 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 |GENERAL ...................................................................................................................1

1.4. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................3
1.5. INTERFACE WITH OTHER SERVICES ...........................................................................5
PART 2 |PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................5
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................5
2.2. CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................6
2.4. INSPECTION AND TESTING ......................................................................................10
2.5. ACCESSORIES ..........................................................................................................11
2.6. REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS ................................................................................11
2.7. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL ..........................................................12
2.8. MANUFACTURER .....................................................................................................13
PART 3 |EXECUTION .............................................................................................................13
3.1. INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................13
3.2. TESTING & COMMISSIONING .................................................................................13
3.3. POST COMMISSIONING ..........................................................................................16
3.4. CLEANING ...............................................................................................................17
3.5. DEMONSTRATION ....................................................................................................17
3.6. CLIENT TRAINING .....................................................................................................17
Motor Control Center Section 26 24 19- 0

SECTION 26 24 19 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
Main Low Voltage Switchgear and accessories
B. Related Sections:
26-2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
26-3623 Automatic Transfer Switch
26-2313 Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear
26-2416 Panel Boards
26-2419 Motor Control Centers
26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26-0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26-0573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26-3523 Power Factor Correction Equipment
26-2713 Metering

best International Standards and
B. Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of IEC 60364, IET
Regulations (BS 7671) and the requirements of the Local Supply
Authority.

the relevant International
D. Electrical Codes and International Standards and requirements of the

Local Supply Authority.

E. The system and system components shall comply with:
IEC 60038 – IEC Standard Voltages
IEC 60364 – Low Voltage Electrical installations
IEC 61439 – Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60947 – Standards for low-voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 61643 – Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power

distribution systems
IEC 61643 – Low-voltage surge protective devices
IEC 60755 – General requirements for residual current operated

protective devices
IEC 61140 – Protection against electric shocks - common aspects for

installation and equipment
IEC 60664 – Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage

systems
IEC 60715 – Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC 60255 – Measuring relays and protection equipment - Common

requirements
IEC 60726 – Dry type power transformers
IEC 60146 – Semiconductor converters
IEC 60269 – Low-voltage fuses - General requirements
IEC 60529 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 60044-1 – Current transformers
IEC 60044-2 – Voltage transformers
IEC 408 – Low voltage air break switches, air break disconnectors, air
break switch disconnectors and fuse combination switches.
F. In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

most stringent shall be applied for costing purposes; the Engineer shall

determine the required allowance.
G. Local Code and Statutory Requirements will take precedence.
A. The Motor Control Center (MCC) shall be suitable and fit for purpose for
operation in the identified environment shown on the schematic/layout
drawings and as specific requirements stated in the
B. Scope of Works section of this specification.
C. This Specification covers the general requirements for design,

manufacture, testing and supply of Motor Control Centers.
D. The Contractor shall install the MCC as shown in the drawings and in full
compliance to this specification, the international standards specified in
the following section & the local authority regulations. In case of
difference between this specification and the specified international
standards and the local authority regulations, the more stringent
requirements in compliance with local authority regulations shall prevail.
E. The Contractor shall employ the switchgear device manufacturer to

include the MCC s within the discrimination study of the proposed
electrical distribution system and final selected loads, to identify, verify
and report all required protection device settings.
F. The Contractor shall comply with all MEP Preliminary - General

Requirements including work practices, general submittals,
commissioning, warrantees, etc.
1.4. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the supply, installation and commissioning stage of all MCCs

with the following:
1. Construction of switch board enclosure to ensure switch panel and

associated switchgear fits in the space provided. Minimum free
maintenance space of 1500mm at front of panel, 800mm at back of
panel and 600mm at side of panel.

2. Local supply authority for provision of installation, incoming cables and

required meters.
3. Civil engineers for all plinths, trenches and structural requirements to

support the panels and enable cable ways in accordance with Local
Authority requirements.
4. Busbar manufacturer for flange connections onto the MCC. (NOT

APPLICABLE)
5. Generator controls manufacturer/supplier for start/stop of the

engine/alternator and changeover of supplies to back-up power. (NOT
APPLICABLE)
6. Power factor correction/harmonic filter equipment vendor. (NOT

APPLICABLE)
7. Battery charging system supplier for motorized switching mechanisms

including frame (integrated/separate), voltage selection and Amp Hour
capacity to suit battery location and provide no less than 50 no.
switching operations under power outage.
8. BMS vendor for status monitoring/control of all main breakers,

changeover devices and digital in/out signals for digital multi-meters.
Coordinated for all load shedding allowances including time delays as
specified. (NOT APPLICABLE)
9. Delivery, Access and Maintenance Strategist e.g. lifting eyes, modular

requirements and removable panels.
10. Maintain required workspace clearances including required door swings

/panel openings to allow for maintenance access and equipment
replacement.
11. Maintain required cable/busbar bending radius between containment

system and panel entry to comply with manufacturers literature and
good practice guidelines.
12. Cable busbar terminals/connectors to be purposely manufactured to

allow multiple parallel cable connections to incoming or outgoing

terminals where indicated on the drawings.
1.5. INTERFACE WITH OTHER SERVICES
The MCC vendor shall coordinate the manufacture and assembly of the
MCC with the following
A. specialists to ensure correct operation of systems and plant under the

prescribed conditions:
1. Mechanical services trade
2. Fire and Voice Alarm System vendor
3. BMS System vendor (NOT APPLICABLE)
B. The MCC vendor shall review the Mechanical services trade shop
drawings, schematics and schedules to determine exact rating of
equipment and plant to be controlled by the MCC.
C. Equipment protection, overload devices, motor starters, variable speed

controllers, relays, devices etc., shall all be selected to match the
fan/pump/damper/valve etc. to be controlled by the system.
D. Submit detailed shop drawings of the system for review by the Engineer
prior to manufacture.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. Control Centers shall be suitable for use on a 400 Volt three phase and
neutral, (TP/N) 4 wire 50Hz, solidly earthed AC system.
B. All equipment supplied shall comply with the relevant British Standards
and DEWA regulations.
C. Busbars, structures, enclosures and equipment shall be adequate to

withstand the stresses imposed by short circuit of 50 kA RMS for 1 second
ASTA certified.
D. Control centers shall be complete with all interconnecting wiring and

shall have terminals in each compartment for control wiring and power

connections.
2.2. CONSTRUCTION
A. Motor control centers shall be modular construction factory-built

assemblies, floor mounted, free standing with minimum degree of
protection IP42 for indoor areas. The control centers shall be constructed
to Form 4A Type 2 construction. Smaller, wall mounted MCC’s shall be
constructed to Form 2B, Type 2.
B. Control centers shall be based on a unit grid system with a maximum

height of 2200mm. The top and bottom frames shall be fitted with gland
plates or cover plates depending on the cable entry. The top frame shall
have provision for fitting lifting eye-bolts and the bottom frame with
mounting holes for raming foundation bolts.
C. Enclosures shall be made of steel frames bolted and welded together

to form a rigid free -standing dead front structure, with flush, flange type
sheet steel doors and cover plates as required. All sections shall be of
uniform dimension and appearance.
D. Sections shall be 2mm zinc coated corrosion resistant treated after all
forming and welding have been completed and all holes have been
punched.
E. Functional units shall be fixed type to accept plug-in / withdrawable

breakers.
F. Mounting assemblies, together with their functional units shall be bolted

to the basic structure. The structure shall be 16 basic modules high and
capable of accepting mounting assemblies that are in multiples of a
basic module.
G. Functional units shall have rotary front operating handles interlocked to

prevent opening the unit when the switching device is closed. Side and
rear covers shall completely enclose all live parts.
H. Provision shall be made for padlocking the operating handles with the
switching device open.

I. Steelwork shall pass through four stages of finishing chemical spray,

degreasing, iron phosphating and electro-statically applied top coat.
The top coat shall be light blue/grey RAL 7032. Inside colour shall be
white. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, cable entries shall be
from the top, with cable access from the front.
J. Starter feeder power and control cables shall be brought out neatly to
terminals which shall be segregated by a steel enclosure.
K. Provide engraved lamicoid nameplates with black letters on white

background, as follows:
L. Main nameplate, 13mm letters, mounted on front of upper wiring

compartment.
M. Unit nameplates, 3mm letters, mounted on unit doors or cover plates.
N. Nameplates shall be mechanically fixed with round head screws.

Nameplates shall include equipment numbers and names in agreement
with the riser diagrams.
O. Indicating lamps, push buttons, control and selector switches shall be

neatly and logically flush mounted on front of the respective equipment
compartment doors.
P. Control centers shall be complete with cable supports, cleats, glands,

clamps, lugs and the like for the termination of all incoming and
outgoing cables. Sizes and types shall be as specified on the drawings
for power, control, protection, indication and alarm cables.
Q. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided within the assembly and

shall be controlled by a panel mounted hygrostat (humidity detector)
with a 50% to 100% relative humidity setting.
2.3 BUSBARS
A. Main horizontal busbars shall be insulated hard drawn tinned coated

copper with silver plated joints running the full length of the MCCs.
Current rating as shown in the drawings rated for 500C ambient.

Supports shall be fibreglass reinforced, moulded type material, and shall

be totally enclosed in a separate sheet steel compartment, braced for
a fault level of 50 kA RMS (symmetrical).
B. Vertical and horizontal busbars shall be fully insulated using either high
dielectric strength purpose manufactured rigid PVC sections or coating
applied by the fluidized bed principle. Vertical busbars shall be hard
drawn tinned coated copper with silver plated joints, suitable
connected to the main horizontal bus-bar run in a separate totally
enclosed sheet steel enclosure. The busbars shall be supported at short
intervals by fibreglass reinforced moulded type material.
C. Vertical busbar shall be of the same size and current rating as the
horizontal busbar assemblies.
D. A copper earth busbar not smaller than 6 x 50mm shall be run across the
bottom of the control centres. The metal enclosure and bases of all
equipment shall be connected to the earth bus.
E. Provision shall be made for extending the main and ground buses at
either end of the control center.
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Starters, contractors, protective devices, control transformers,

pushbuttons, indicating lights and the like shall be in accordance with
the applicable sections and standards of this Specification.
B. Control and switching units shall be modular plug-in type, secured in

place by captive screws or speed fasteners. Control and switching units
of the same size shall be interchangeable.
C. Provide insulating barriers and door switches where required to isolate

and interrupt remote control voltages. Identify remote voltage sources
by means of engraved warning signs on the compartment doors, with
3mm white letters on red background.
D. Provide spaces for the future addition of control or switching units

totaling at least 20% of the active spaces in the control center. Future

spaces shall be complete with bus, guide rails and all required parts,
ready to receive a starter.
E. MCCBs feeding motors shall be motor Duty Type and shall be as detailed
on the drawings, manually operated, fixed type with thermal and
magnetic release for short circuit protection and without overload
release. Short circuit breaking capacity shall not be less than 50kA for 1
sec. at 415V, 50Hz.
F. Starter feeders shall be equipped with but not limited to:
1. Main MCCB with door interlocked rotary handle. (lockable in the off
position).
2. Contactors for direct on-line starting or star-delta starting as shown on

the drawings.
3. Thermal overload relay with built in single phasing prevention feature.
4. Hand-Off-Auto control switch.
5. Common duty selector switch. (where applicable)
6. Thermistor relay. (where applicable)
7. RUN/TRIP lamps.
8. Auto changeover arrangement. (where applicable)
G. Controls within each starter shall be 24VAC fed via a 220/24V

transformer located in each functional unit.
H. Current transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-1.
1. The conditional ratings of current transformers shall correspond with the

F.B.A. rating, and shall maintain metering accuracy or as required to
operate relays within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
2. Current transformers shall have the following accuracies as a minimum:
a. Protection applications : Class 5P
b. Indication : Class 3
c. Metering : Class 0.5

3. Manufacturer shall ensure that the current transformers shall operate

relays correctly when set at any point within their ranges.
4. Current transformers secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side

through a removable link. Where current transformers are connected in
star, the star point shall be earthed through a removable link.
5. Shorting links shall be provided for each current transformer.
6. Current transformer shall be cast resin insulated.
I. Voltage transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-2.
1. Voltage transformers shall be suitable in rating and accuracy for their

functions, loads and duties. As a minimum they shall have the following
accuracies:
a. Protection Applications : Class 6P
b. Indication and Metering : Class 0.5
2. Primary and secondary circuits of the voltage transformers shall be

protected by fuses and the secondary winding shall be earthed at one
point through a removable link.
3. Voltage transformers shall be cast resin insulated.
4. Manufacturers shall provide MCBs with auxiliary contacts or alternatively

4 -pole MCBs on the secondary side of the voltage transformers.
J. Provide three spare fuses of each rating used clipped inside each panel.
K. Provide six spare indicator lamps and transformers clipped inside each
panel.
L. Indicators shall be of the integral transformer type.
3.4. INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Testing
1. Control centers shall be subject to inspection and testing during

manufacture and after completion by the Engineer.
2. Acceptance by the Engineer of any control center shall not alleviate

the manufacturer or the contractor from any performance guarantee,

or from any other contractual obligations.
3. Defects as a result of testing and inspection shall be repaired and made

good by the manufacturer. Failed tests shall be repeated and witnessed
by the Engineer or his representative prior to shipment of the control
centers. All costs incurred due to repeated tests shall be borne by the
Contractor. All results of such repairs and repeated tests shall be
documented and issued to the Engineer.
4. The Engineer shall be notified 14 days in advance of any testing at the

manufacturer’s plant of at site. Failure to notify the engineer of tests may
result in tests being repeated with all costs for same being borne by the
Contractor.
5. Test procedure shall be as follows:
a. Complete point to point check of all control wiring.
b. Megger test all control and dower circuits at 1000 volts for 1 minute
with all electronic devices disconnected. Insulation resistance shall
not be less than 10 mega-ohms.
c. Functional test all circuit breakers, switches, contactors, control

circuit logic, indicating lights, push buttons and the like to verify
correct operation.
d. Primary injection tests of all relays, CTs, indicating and metering

instruments.
3.5. ACCESSORIES
A. Provide any special tools in duplicate. The standard accessories to be

supplied with each control center shall be stated in the Tender. The
contractor shall furnish a list of recommended spare parts for 1-year
maintenance.
3.6. REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Within a month from the commercial date, or other period as may be

agreed with the Engineer, the supplier shall submit the following
drawings and/or particulars:
1. Detailed technical specifications.
2. Technical schedule.
3. Testing schedule procedure.
4. List of drawings corresponding to all drawings submitted by the

Contractor with the Tender.
5. Outline general arrangement, sections and detailed drawings for the

control centers.
6. Drawings showing the construction of the control centers and terminal

arrangements with details of all accessories.
7. Single line diagram showing all auxiliary devices and their connections.
8. Details of cable terminations and fittings.
9. Details of anti-corrosion protection and painting specification.
B. Drawings shall be scaled and fully detailed. All-important dimensions

shall be given in metric units and the materials of which each part is to
be constructed shall be indicated. Drawings shall not exceed 750mm in
any dimensioned, and shall bear approved contract reference.
C. Six (6) prints of drawings for approval shall be submitted. After having
been approved, the Contractor shall supply as many corrected copies
as required by the Engineer. At least one copy shall be reproducible
tracing. A minimum period of ten (10) days shall be allowed for study
and comments/approval.
3.7. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Prior to delivery of the equipment the supplier shall submit to the

Engineer six (6) sets of manuals for all equipment supplied under the
Contract. The manual shall be A4 size bound in a loose-leaf binder or
booklets suitably enclosed and shall include the following:
1. A complete set of all corrected drawings prepared by the supplier and

approved by the Engineer. All drawings included shall be folded to fit

within the binders.
2. Setting up, commissioning and operation instructions.
3. Trouble shooting procedure.
4. Maintenance instructions including schedules for preventive

maintenance.
5. Complete recommended spare parts list including manufacturer’s

name and catal number with all required ordering information.
B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared to allow the

purchaser and operators to fully understand the product, its theory of
operations, its application and performance.
3.8. MANUFACTURER
A. Motor control centers and control panels shall be from the same
manufacturer as the main and sub -main switchboards.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. The Contract shall include for the provision of an approved type 1.20m
wide rubber floor mat to be fitted along the full length of each MCC
supplied under this Contract.
B. The MCC and components within shall be installed in accordance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations, the specification and any
requirements of the local power supply authority requirements.
C. After installation and levelling, ensure all entries into the MCC are insect
and rodent proof by means of suitable plates, grouting or screens. All
incoming and outgoing ways shall be sealed prior to completion.
3.2. TESTING & COMMISSIONING
A. Testing Factory Acceptance Tests: Arrange and pay for a standard

factory test of the MCC prior to shipping to site. Allow for travel and
accommodation for the Engineer and Client to witness the quality,
testing and operation of the MCC prior to delivery.
The same pre-tests are to be performed on site in the presence of the

Manufacturers technicians, prior to energizing. The results are to be
measured against the factory acceptance tests.
B. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the

following preparations for tests:
1. Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full

updating on final system configuration and parameters where they
supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract
Documents.
2. Visual inspection of circuits, device operations, correct identification

and quality.
3. Make insulation resistance tests of MCC buses, components, and

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits
4. Make continuity of all circuits
5. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of MCC to

test organization.
C. Quality Control Testing Program: Conform to the following:
1. Program Objectives: To assure MCC installation meets specified

requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, provides
appropriate protection for systems and equipment, and is suitable for
energizing.
2. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare MCC for
satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and these specifications.
3. Schedule tests and notify at least one week in advance of test

commencement
4. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report

defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of

adjustments and remedial efforts.
5. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort. Apply

a label to tested components indicating test results, person responsible,
and date.
6. Protective Device calibration certificate, Ratings and Settings; Verify

indicated ratings and settings and make the final system adjustments of
Overcurrent Protection Devices.
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following Inspections

and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and
nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections.
2. Verify that potential transformers, including their overcurrent protection

and current transformers meet specified requirements.
3. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and

other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction
manual.
4. Check MCC anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of

components.
5. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque

wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
6. Clean MCC interior and exterior-using manufacturer's approved

methods and materials.
7. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for

Overcurrent Protective
8. Devices
E. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance

with manufacturer’s instruction:
1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that

disconnect from solid state devices through normal disconnecting

features.
2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
3. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.
4. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating

voltage of control power elements including control power transformer
and control power wiring.
5. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.
6. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified for compliance.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and

retest MCCs. Verify by the retests that MCCs meet specified
requirements.
3.3. POST COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Within 2 months of handover of the works, perform an

infrared scan of MCC bus joints and connections. Open or remove
metal doors, covers, inspection plates, and barriers to make joints and
connections accessible to a portable scanner.
B. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform 2 additional follow-up infrared

scans of the same joints and connections, one 4 months after handover
and one 11 months after award of TOC (Taking over Certificate).
C. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide documentation of device calibration.
D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all

connections checked and describing results of scanning. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and
observations after remedial action.
E. At full building occupancy or 6 months into defects period (whichever

soonest), the Contractor shall test the total harmonic distortion (THD) at
the points of common coupling i.e. each transformer. If the total

harmonic distortion (%) exceeds the Local Authority Allowances, the

Contractor shall employ a specialist harmonic filter supplier/installer to
design, supply install, test and commission passive or active filters to
reduce measured total harmonic distortion within acceptable limits.
3.4. CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of MCCs.

Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, metal filings and debris.
Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.5. DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the testing of the MCC during factory tests and after
installation at site. The Contractor is to complete all testing and record
results prior to offering a demonstration to the Client/Engineer.
3.6. CLIENT TRAINING
A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service

representatives to demonstrate MCCs and train Employer's
maintenance personnel.
A. Provide comprehensive record information for all main MCCs including

wiring diagrams, OEM component details and enclosures.
B. Provide and hang framed protected copies of all related distribution

schematic drawings within each associated Switch room.

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.3. SAMPLES ....................................................................................................................2
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................2
2.1. GENERAL (LIGHTING) ................................................................................................2
2.2. LIGHTING SWITCHES ..................................................................................................2
2.3. LAMP HOLDERS, LAMPS & CEILING ROSES .............................................................3
2.4. SHAVER SOCKET OUTLETS & SHAVER LIGHTS ..........................................................4
2.5. TIME SWITCHES ..........................................................................................................5
2.6. GENERAL (SMALL POWER) (NOT APPLICABLE).......................................................5
2.7. GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET OUTLETS ......................................................................6
2.8. NON STANDARD SOCKET OUTLETS ..........................................................................7
2.9. SOCKETS FOR USE OUTDOORS OR FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT ..........................7
2.10. FUSED CONNECTION UNITS ......................................................................................8
2.11. INDUSTRIAL PLUGS & SOCKETS .................................................................................8
2.12. 20 AMP DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ............................................................................9
2.13. FLEX OUTLET PLATES ................................................................................................10
2.14. COOKER CONTROL UNITS ......................................................................................10
2.15. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES ............................................................................10
2.16. SOCKETS IN CAR PARKS (NOT APPLICABLE) .........................................................11
PART 3 | EXECUTION ......................................................................................................11
3.1. GENERAL..................................................................................................................11
3.2. LUMINAIRE CONNECTION (LIGHTING) ..................................................................11
3.3. POSITION OF LIGHTING SWITCHES .........................................................................12
3.5. INSTALLATION (SMALL POWER) ..............................................................................12

SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
Sockets
Switches
Fused Connection Units
Domestic Isolators
Junction Boxes
B. The selection of all outlet materials, colours and finishes must follow the
ID and Architectural requirements.
C. Wiring accessory outlet plate finish will vary according to areas of use.
Generally, in all public areas and apartments/villas, the wiring accessory
plate will be Satin Nickel finish. Metal clad outlets in ceiling spaces and
electrical rooms / plant rooms and white plastic in Back of House offices
and stores. Refer to relevant ID specification section for types. Final
acceptance will be required by the Architect/ID Designers.

authority.

the relevant, International Electrical Codes and International Standards
and requirements of the local supply authority.

D. The Contractor shall provide a schedule identifying all differences for

1.3. SAMPLES
A. Provide samples of all accessories to be provided for the various areas

of the contract. These shall be presented on a common samples board
and held in the Engineer’s office for the duration of the Contract.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL (LIGHTING)
A. The finish of accessories shall be generally as indicated under Section

16142 and shall match the small power wiring devices throughout.
2.2. LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. Lighting switches shall be 20-amp single pole, one way, two way or
intermediate way, and be mounted in singles or in gangs as required. All
units shall be suitable for the AC supply and mounted at the height
detailed on the attached schedules or shown on the drawings unless
otherwise stated.
B. Switches shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting, as required, and

be complete with pressed steel box to BS 4662 or BS 5733, adjustable
grid plate, switch interior and cover plate. All grid plates to be earthed
to the mounting box by means of a short green/yellow PVC sheathed
bonding wire.
C. Each switch interior shall be of porcelain or bakelite, mounted to a top

adjustable grid plate and complete with a switch rocker to match the
finished plate. At least 9mm clearance shall be provided between the
switch and the inner wall of the box.
D. Flush mounting switch plates shall be flat, overlapping the associated

metal box by not less than 5.5mm at all sides. Switch plates shall be
manufactured from white amino plastic urea powder moulding with
high track resisting qualities or stainless steel to an approved sample in
accordance with the attached schedules unless otherwise stated.
E. In plant rooms, service areas and other similar areas as specified, the

switches shall be arranged in singles or in gangs as required complete

with protected type dolly. Switches assemblies shall be stove enamel or
galvanized to match the connected conduit.
F. Switches mounted in exposed locations or positions subject to moisture

shall be enclosed in a galvanized metal weatherproof enclosure in
accordance with BS 5420 and an approved sample.
G. All ceiling switches shall be complete with a 50.8mm fixing center

conduit box, porcelain or bakelite interior and overlapping plate,
finished as the general lighting switches unless otherwise stated. Each
unit shall be complete with white nylon cord and white acorn, to
terminate at 1.5m above FFL.
H. Where two or more phases of the supply are connected to a single

switch assembly, switch units finished as above shall be provided
complete with the necessary phase barriers and identifications, in order
to comply with the relevant clauses of BS 7671.
I. Switch plates specified to be labelled shall be suitably engraved to

clearly denote the function of the switch. Details of the actual engraving
shall be determined at a later date or is given in the following
specification section and/or on the drawings.
J. Where indicator switches are shown on the attached drawings, they

shall be as the general lighting switches, with the addition of a red
indication light.
K. All switches shall fully comply with BS 3676, quick make and break for DC
and slow make and break for AC supplies.
L. Where scene setting dimmer, switches are proposed for guest rooms
and suites, the switch plates shall be from the same manufacturer as the
small power wiring devices.
2.3. LAMP HOLDERS, LAMPS & CEILING ROSES
A. Where a main sensing conductor (un-switched live) is required, i.e. for

emergency lights, the Contractor shall include for the provision of a 4-
pin ceiling plug and socket device required. Plug and socket serving

emergency lighting shall be coloured red and final connected banded

with red ferrules.
B. The Contract shall include for ceiling roses to be manufactured from

white bakelite, suitable for direct connection to a 50.8mm fixing center
BS.4568 conduit box, unless otherwise stated.
C. Each ceiling rose shall fully comply with BS.67.
D. Plug-in type universal ceiling roses, manufactured from either rigid PVC
or bakelite and complete with 50.8mm fixing centers and short length of
three core flexible cord shall be used for the final connection to all
luminaires incorporated in or on to false ceilings.
2.4. SHAVER SOCKET OUTLETS & SHAVER LIGHTS
A. Shaver sockets shall be of the dual voltage type each contained in a

flush mounted pressed steel box, finished in a white moulding with
overlapping cover trim to match the lighting switches. Each unit shall be
an approved sample.
B. The sockets shall fully comply with BS.3535: Part 1 (EN.60742) and Section
553 of BS.7671 (I.E.E. Regulations) to be suitable for use in a room
containing a fixed bath or shower, or where the outlet is positioned
immediately adjacent to a wash hand basin.
C. Each socket assembly shall incorporate a double wound isolating

transformer rated 20VA at 230 or 115 volts, arranged such that the
insertion of the shaver plug automatically switches on the transformer
and removal automatically switches it off.
D. The transformer shall be protected against overload by an automatic

solid-state overload device with automatic resetting. The socket shall
accept razor plugs to British, Australian, European and American
standards and be the shuttered pattern.
E. The cover plate of the shaver socket shall be inscribed SHAVERS ONLY
with the addition of a pictogram symbol. Samples of same shall be
provided.
F. Unless otherwise stated in the following specification section or on the

drawing, shaver lights shall comprise combined light unit with dual
voltage shaver socket incorporating the technical standards described
above. Each shaver light shall be complete with a pull cord switch to
control the light only. Shaver lights shall comply with BS.4533: Section 102-
1 and the Contractor shall earth bond the fittings in accordance with
the requirements of BS.7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations).
G. In some instances, shaver units shall be incorporated into built-in wall

furniture. The Contractor shall allow for connecting these devices to the
circuit wiring.
H. Accessories used for power, communications and lighting shall match

one another, and be from the same manufacturer, within each area of
the project.
2.5. TIME SWITCHES
A. Time switches shall be of the Solar Dial type with battery backup, and
shall have a single or multiple ON and OFF as specified with adjustable
settings for each channel.
B. Each channel shall be programmable to operate on individual days

and/or block programmes.
C. The units shall be suitable for operation on a 230V, 50Hz single phase.
D. The switch shall be enclosed in a moulded casing comprising a base

with extended terminal cover and transparent front cover. The switch
mechanism shall plug into the base to obviate the necessity for a
separate terminal block, and when in position all live parts shall be totally
enclosed.
2.6. GENERAL (SMALL POWER) (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. The finish of accessories shall be generally as indicated below:
1. Main entrance / public areas – polished brass or brushed stainless steel

(flush)
2. Apartments –
a. Living room/bedrooms – white plastic (flush)

b. Kitchens – brushed white plastic (flush)
3. Offices – white plastic (flush)
4. Air-conditioned plant rooms – metal clad (surface)
5. Ceiling void spaces – white plastic (surface)
6. Back of house corridors – metal clad (flush)
7. Car park – IP56 grey polycarbonate (surface)
8. Outside areas, IP56 grey polycarbonate (surface)
9. Concealed within furniture – white plastic (flush)
B. The Contractor shall include for ensuring that the correctly rated fuse is
provided in all plug tops and fused connection units etc.
2.7. GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET OUTLETS
A. The Contract shall include for the supply and installation of the general
purpose 13 amp switched socket outlets positioned as shown on the
drawings, the sockets being wired in accordance with the circuit details
indicated on the attached drawings. Each socket outlet shall fully
comply with BS.1363. Cartridge fuses shall comply with BS.1362.
B. The 13-amp socket outlets shall comprise single or twin units as shown on
the drawings. Each outlet shall be complete with a plug top, unless
otherwise stated and manufactured in accordance with an approved
sample.
C. Each socket outlet shall be finished either in metal or made from white
amino plastic urea powder mouldings to BS.1322 as detailed in the
finishes schedule above with cover plate to match the lighting switches,
suitable for flush or surface mounting as necessary. Where metal plates
are used, they shall be fitted with white bakelite inserts.
D. Each 13-amp socket outlet shall be complete with a pressed steel box
to BS.4662 or BS.5733.
E. In the plant, roof space and other similar areas switch socket outlets
complete with protected type dolly and galvanized finish shall be

supplied and installed as detailed in the following Specification Sections

and/or drawings.
F. Each socket shall be of the rectangular three pin type complete with
line and neutral shutters. The shutters shall be manufactured from
unbreakable insulating material which shall be non -ignitable and track
resistant.
G. The shutters shall effectively screen and isolate the line and neutral
socket outlets to exclude dust and interference and shall only be
operable when the interlocked earth pin in the associated plug top has
been inserted.
H. Each switch associated with a socket outlet shall be complete with

adequate ON and OFF markings.
I. Switch socket outlets complete with red neon indicating lamps shall be
provided in the positions indicated on the attached drawings and/or
J. All socket plug tops shall be in accordance with BS.1363. Live and
neutral pins shall be complete with safety sleeves and fitted with
appropriate rated fuses to BS.1362.
2.8. NON-STANDARD SOCKET OUTLETS
A. Where specified in this Specification and detailed on the drawings, non-

standard gauge sockets and plugs shall be used.
B. These shall be non-interchangeable with any other outlets and shall be

rated as indicated on the drawings 220-volt a.c. maximum.
C. Each outlet shall be complete with plug top.
D. Each socket outlet shall be finished with cover plate to match other
outlets, switches etc. Where metal plates are used, they shall be fitted
with white bakelite inserts.
E. Each switch associated with a socket outlet shall be complete with

adequate ON and OFF markings.
2.9. SOCKETS FOR USE OUTDOORS OR FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

A. Where socket outlets are to be installed to supply equipment outside the

zone created by the main equipotential bonding of the installation it
shall be supplied from a circuit with a residual current protective device
(not exceeding 30 milliamperes rating). A notice of durable material
which shall remain legible throughout the life of the installation must be
fixed on or near the socket outlet stating FOR EQUIPMENT OUTDOORS in
both English and Arabic.
B. Alternatively, the socket shall be a combined unit consisting of a socket

outlet and residual current circuit breaker (not exceeding 30
milliamperes rating). Again, a similar notice to the above is required.
C. Where sockets for use outdoors are specified and indicated on the
drawing, provision shall be for 13-amp weatherproof switched socket
outlets in accordance with BS 1363 with an IP rating no less than IP55
and brass fixing screws shall be used
2.10. FUSED CONNECTION UNITS
A. Fused connection units shall be of the switched or unswitched type,

incorporating flex outlet facilities, complete with a red neon indicator
light and positioned as indicated on the Tender drawings and/or
B. Each outlet shall be manufactured in accordance with BS.5733.
C. Each unit shall be complete with a sheet steel box adjustable top grid
and plate finished to match the lighting switches.
D. White moulded inserts and fuse holders shall be fitted to each unit,
together with an appropriately rated cartridge fuse to BS.1362.
E. Where fused connection units serve remote items, the Contractor shall
include for the supply of an independent flex outlet with each unit. The
flex outlet shall be located adjacent to the terminals of equipment
being supplied.
2.11. INDUSTRIAL PLUGS & SOCKETS
A. All round pin 2A, 5A, 15A and 30A socket outlets shall comply with the
requirements of EN 6 0309.

B. Industrial plugs for socket and connectors shall have a polycarbonate

enclosure and brass conducting pins. The whole unit shall have an
enclosure code to IP44. The enclosure colour shall match that of the
industrial socket outlet colours and be in full accordance with EN 60309.
C. Industrial Plugs and Sockets to BS.4343/I.E.C. 309
1. Round pin socket outlets shall be provided where shown on the

attached drawings and shall be of the 16, 32 or 63 Amp 230 or 400-volt,
50 Hz pattern as required, manufactured in accordance with BS.4343
and/or I.E.C. 309.
2. The socket outlets shall generally be surface mounting with

polycarbonate body, spring cover and top/rear conduit entry facilities,
as appropriate, unless specified otherwise on the drawings or Particular
Specification section. Panel mounting type shall be employed where
outlets are fitted to steel cable trunking, enclosures and suchlike.
3. Outlets for use on single phase supplies shall be of the 2-pole and earth
pin type and those for use on three-phase supplies shall be 4-pole and
earth.
4. All outlets and associated plugs shall be splash proof to IP54, unless
otherwise detailed. The Contract shall include for a matching plug, to
BS.4343/I.E.C.309, for each socket outlet installed but final confirmation
of the quantity shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to ordering.
2.12. 20 AMP DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES
A. 20 amp rated double pole switches shall be provided where shown and
shall be suitable for use on 220-volt 50 Hz supply.
B. Each 20-amp DP switch shall be manufactured in accordance with

BS.3676.
C. Each unit shall be either flush mounting complete with recessed pressed
steel box or surface mounting, as appropriate, with front plate matching
the local lighting switch and small power outlets.
D. The switch plate shall incorporate, where shown, on the drawings flex
outlet and/or indicator light units in addition to the 20-amp double pole

switch assembly.
E. Switches for use with water heaters shall have the plate engraved water
heater.
F. Wiring terminals shall each be capable of accepting a minimum of 2

No. 4mm sq. conductors.
2.13. FLEX OUTLET PLATES
A. Flex outlet plates shall be suitable for flush or surface mounting, as

required, and be complete with pressed steel box and cover plate.
B. The flex outlet plates shall be finished to match the local lighting switch
and small power outlets, as indicated.
C. Each unit shall be fitted with three pairs of terminals, each being able to
accommodate the required size of conductor.
D. A cord grip shall be fitted into each unit.
E. Where flex outlets are to be installed in exposed, damp or similar areas

the outlets shall be of a galvanized steel pattern or other heavy-duty
protection.
2.14. COOKER CONTROL UNITS
A. Cooker control units shall be constructed in accordance with BS.4177

and shall comprise a 45-amp double pole switch and neon indicator.
B. The complete unit shall have a metal or plastic plate to match the other
accessories in the area and shall be installed adjacent to the cooking
appliance (not directly behind or above).
C. The final wiring shall comprise high temperature LSF insulated cables
installed in conduit to a low-level flex outlet plate to which the appliance
tails shall be connected.
D. The control unit shall be located within 2.0m of the appliance.
E. Cooker units shall be dedicated to the appliance and be protected by

a 30mA RCBO.
2.15. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Where specified and indicated on the drawings miscellaneous

accessories shall be provided. Each unit shall be finished either in metal
or made from white amino plastic urea powder mouldings to BS.1322
with cover plate to match the lighting switches and small power outlets.
B. Each unit shall be manufactured in accordance with the relevant British

Standards.
1. 2 amp/5-amp socket outlet - BS.546
2. 30-amp double pole switch - BS.3676
3. 32-amp TP & N switch - BS. EN60947.3
4. 45-amp double pole switch - BS.3676
2.16. SOCKETS IN CAR PARKS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Outlets in car park areas shall be surface mounted.
B. These shall be water and dust protected to IP56.
C. Locate all outlets in discrete areas within the car park area.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations to comply with the local and European Norms and
this specification.
B. Cover plates shall be removed and inserts masked prior to painting.
C. Refer to mounting heights on detail drawings. Install wiring accessories

accordingly.
3.2. LUMINAIRE CONNECTION (LIGHTING)
A. In the case of fluorescent luminaires, two such conduit boxes shall be

provided at appropriate fixing centers.
B. A heat resisting flexible cord shall be connected from the terminal block
to the fitting. Care shall be taken to ensure that the metalwork of the
fitting is effectively earthed.

C. Final connection to each bulkhead luminaire shall be by a standard

circular conduit box in accordance with IEC 61386 mounted
immediately adjacent to the wiring.
D. Wiring of sub-circuit cables through luminaires shall not be allowed

unless otherwise stated.
E. The Contractor shall ensure that all ceiling recess, fixed or plug-in, shall
be accessible for maintenance and testing purposes.
3.3. POSITION OF LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. Particular attention shall be given to the position of switches with

reference to the hanging of doors.
B. The Engineers attention shall be drawn to locations where switch

positions are at variance with drawings, consistent with the following
conditions:
1. Single doors: Switches shall be located adjacent to \
closing side of door.
2. Unequal two -Switches shall be located adjacent to leaf doors:

hanging style of narrower portion of doors.
3. Equal two- Switches shall be located adjacent to the leaf doors:
left hand side of the doors on entering.
C. Switches shall not be installed within 2.0m of any water tap, wash basin
or sink.
A. Show the location and type of all wiring devices on the as-installed
Record Drawings.
B. Include manufacturers published data within the O&M Manual.
3.5. INSTALLATION (SMALL POWER)
A. All accessories shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations, local authority requirements and European Norms
and this specification.

B. Unless specified or shown otherwise, all 20 Amp DP switches shall be

mounted adjacent to the equipment served via the switch. Wherever it
is appropriate, the mounting height shall match the height of the local
lighting switches.
C. Unless specified or shown otherwise, all flex outlet plates shall be

mounted adjacent to the equipment being connected from the flex
outlet.
D. Cover plates shall be removed and inserts masked prior to painting.
E. Socket outlets or switches shall not be installed within 2.0m of any water
tap, wash basin or sink.
F. Socket outlets or switches shall not be installed in any bathroom or

shower room.
A. Show the location and type of all outlets and accessories on the as
installed Record Drawings.
B. Include manufacturer’s published data within the O&M Manual.

SECTION 26 28 16 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................1
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................1
2.2. ISOLATING SWITCHES ................................................................................................1
2.3. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......................................................................2
2.4. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS .................................................................................4
2.5. RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES ...................................................................................5
2.6. METERS & INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................6
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................7
3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................7
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Section 26 28 16- 0

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
Isolating Switches
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Residual Current Devices

current issue of the IEC and the requirements of the local supply
authority.

1. IEC 60947 – Standards for low-voltage switchgear and control gear

identifying all differences for Client/Engineer’ determination.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. All devices shall be rated for full load operation at 50 deg C.
2.2. ISOLATING SWITCHES
A. All isolating switches shall be hand operated, single pole and neutral,
double pole, triple pole and neutral, or four poles as specified and be

ASTA certified to EN60947.3.
B. The neutral contact shall be arranged to be switched or linked as

specified and in the switched neutral units the neutral contact shall
make before, and break later, than the phase contacts.
C. Units exceeding 100A rating shall have a removable bolted link.
D. Each unit shall be of the 400-volt (a.c. between phase) rating and be
complete with a sheet metal case manufactured from not less than
1.7mm thick metal.
E. Each unit shall incorporate a hinged cover provided with adequate lugs
to enable padlocks to be fitted if required.
F. Suitable phase identification shall be fitted to all units.
G. Each switch shall have a quick make and break switch action with spring
assisted mechanism ensuring positive ON/OFF movement and
identification. Operating handles shall be retractable and arranged to
close the switch with an upward movement.
H. Adequate wiring space shall be provided in each unit to facilitate wiring

and connection and, if possible, removable side and top panels shall
be provided.
I. Each complete unit shall be fitted with all necessary terminals, shrouds,
earthing connections etc., and be stove enameled finished to an
approved colour.
J. Submit details of the proposed manufacturer to the Engineer for review.
2.3. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. The Contractor shall include for moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
to be in accordance with EN60947.2: Part 1 and used only in the
locations as indicated on the attached drawings.
B. Each unit shall be manufactured from high grade non-track mouldings

and be complete with clearly visible enclosed contact areas and de-
ionization chambers ON, OFF and TRIP switch positions, quick make and
break switch actions and lockable switch handle or associated control.

C. Adjustable type electronic trips shall be incorporated in each unit as

specified to provide satisfactory overload and short circuit protection
together with short circuit indicators, undervoltage trips, shunt trips, short
circuit delay trips, motor operated drives and auxiliary contacts as
indicated on the attached drawings and/or Specification Sections/or
Schedules.
D. Each circuit breaker shall be capable of being manually reset only after
tripping against overload or short circuit conditions. Short circuit
delay trips shall be of the stepless, adjustable type within the range of 0-
200 m.s
E. Each circuit shunt trip shall be capable of operating satisfactorily when

the coil voltage is between
F. 70% and 120% of its rated voltage and each undervoltage relay shall be
capable of operating on a slowly failing voltage, at the rated frequency
of between 70% and 35% of the rated operating voltage. Self-resetting
undervoltage relays shall be reset at not less than 85% of the rated
operating voltage.
G. The power operation of MCCB and MCCBI (isolator) units shall be

effected by means of an approved universal type motor complete with
electro-magnetic clutch and emergency hand operating handle.
H. The motor operated units shall be capable of operating satisfactorily

when the motor terminal voltage is between 85% and 105% of rated
voltage.
I. The minimum size of MCCB or MCCBI units indicated on the attached

drawings and/or Specification Sections shall be that which has resulted
from the application of any temperature, enclosure or similar derating
factor.
J. The operation of an MCCB or MCCBI unit shall be such that it shall not
endanger the operator or show signs of undue wear. In all cases the
design of the switch drives shall be arranged to open all poles of the
supply positively and simultaneously. The speed at which the switch
contacts open or close shall be independent of the speed at which the
associated handle is actuated.
K. Where moulded case circuit breakers are used as isolators (MCCBI) they
shall be identical to the basic MCCB units described above but without
the addition of any form of electronic trips or relays, undervoltage relays,
shunt trips, unless otherwise stated.
L. All MCCBs shall include the facility for a remote shunt trip device to be
incorporated via a simple on-site addition.
M. All MCCBs shall include the facility for an earth leakage trip and/or
indication device to be incorporated via a simple on-site addition.
N. The fault rating of MCCB employed shall be at least equal to that

expected at the point install ed in the network.
O. Ensure discrimination on overload and short circuit applications is

achieved using the proposed switchgear components. Under no
operating conditions shall the supply to a whole distribution board be
lost due to a fault on a downstream circuit.
2.4. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Miniature air break circuit breakers shall be provided in accordance

with the following Specification Sections, and shall fully comply with
EN60898: Part 1. Breakers shall be used for the following types of
installation:
115 Type B MCB Domestic power type application (only)
116 Type C MCB -lighting, Industrial and commercial application
117 Type D MCB Motor loads, transformer inrush loads etc.
B. Distribution boards incorporating MCB’s shall be arranged such that sub-

circuits cannot be made alive by unauthorized persons. MCB’s shall be
of the plug-in type or supplied capable of being locked in the OF F
position.
C. All sizes of MCB’s shall be checked with the Engineer before any orders
are placed. Each MCB, unless otherwise stated, shall be of the
hermetically sealed, thermal magnetic type having a rated short circuit

capacity Icn of a minimum of 10kA at 400V.
D. MCB’s used for the final means of protection and isolation to items of
fixed or removable equipment shall be complete with flush GI box and
with front plate arranged as overlapping for flush mounted units.
E. Assemblies shall be arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated

in the detail sections of this Specification, schedules or drawings, and
the associated front plates shall be finished to match the general
lighting switches.
F. MCB’s shall be provided with positive means for preventing any one
pole of a multi-pole MCB being operated or tripped independently of
the other poles.
G. Coordination shall be achieved for all load conditions, particularly on

the essential distribution network, i.e. a fault on a downstream circuit
shall not cause supply to a distribution board to trip.
2.5. RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
A. All earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCBs) shall comply with the relevant
British Standards, as provided by IEC 60755, EN61008-1 or EN61009-1.
B. ELCBs shall be provided within every distribution board to comply with

the requirements of the local supply authority.
C. The sensitivity of the ELCB shall be as follows: -
Circuit/Equipment/Apparatus Rated Operating Current (mA)
118 13A switched socket outlet 30
119 Water heater/coolers 30
120 Refrigerator/washing machine
and similar apparatus 30
121 Domestic water pumps 30
122 Jacuzzi pumps 10
123 Under water lighting 10
124 15A switched socket outlets (general purpose) 30

125 General lighting 30/100
126 Flood lighting 100/300
127 Window/Split type air conditioner 100
128 Fan coil/air handling units/VAV 100
129 Package type A/C unit 100/300
130 Chiller 100-500-1000
131 Irrigation pump 100
132 Electric cooker 100
133 Industrial machine 100/300
134 Elevators/Escalators 300/500
135 Neon sign 300
D. Earth leakage sensing (ELS) devices shall be provided for circuits serving
life safety. These shall be provided with suitable contacts for connecting
on to the BAS. They shall also be provided with audio visual flashing lamp
and/or sounder devices to indicate leakage currents on the protected
circuits.
E. ELS devices shall be provided with shunt trip facilities to activate main
ACBs and / or MCCBs as applicable for A/C chiller units and similar large
items of plant.
F. Adhere to the selected manufacturers installation requirements. Ensure

that the respective breaker rips lie within the time limits recommended
for the category of breaker.
2.6. METERS & INSTRUMENTS
A. All meters and indicating or recording instruments including ammeters,

voltmeters, wattmeters, frequency meters and power factor meters shall
be of the flush mounted, square pattern in accordance with IEC 62052
– 11 respectively.
B. Each instrument shall have an accuracy of not less than that defined in
IEC 62052-11 and be subject to a high voltage test of 2 kV for 1 minute

and an overload capacity test of 10 x full load current for 3 seconds in

accordance with IEC 62052-11.
C. Instruments shall incorporate scale markings in accordance with IEC

60651-1 Part 1 and moving iron movements shall be provided unless
otherwise stated.
D. Each current or voltage transformer used in conjunction with meters,

instruments or protection relays shall be in accordance with IEC 60044-7
and IEC 60044-8.
E. Protection relays and associated equipment shall be in accordance

with IEC 60255-8.
F. Electronic multi-function type Meters (with pulsed output facility to

PMMS/BMS) shall be used on switchboards in preference to analogue
type.
G. All installations with a stated or anticipated maximum demand of

greater than or equal to 300KVA shall have a MD KWH meter fitted. The
meter shall be the electronic multi -function type.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Installation of all devices shall be integrated into the overall distribution

system in accordance with relevant IEC standards, manufacturer’s
recommendations and local regulations.

SECTION 26 41 13- LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

SECTION 26 41 13
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.4. WORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................2
1.5. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................2
1.6. RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................3
1.7. SHOP DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................4
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................4
2.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................4
2.2. ROOF CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE) ...............................................................5
2.3. RING CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE) ................................................................5
2.4. DOWN CONDUCTORS..............................................................................................5
2.5. AIR FINIALS .................................................................................................................6
2.6. TEST POINTS ................................................................................................................6
2.7. EARTH REFERENCE PITS .............................................................................................6
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................7
3.1. GENERAL....................................................................................................................7
Lightning Protection for Structures Section 26 41 13- 0

SECTION 26 41 13 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Lightning Protection System
B. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the

current issue of IEC 60364 and the requirements of the local supply
authority.

D. Provide a lightning protection system in accordance with EN IEC 62305

and IEC 61024 to protect the building structures and personnel from the
risk of a lightning strike.
E. Listed below are the standards applicable to this section.
IEC 62305 – Lightning Protection Standard
IEC 61936 – Code of Practice for Earthing
IEC61024 – Protection of Structures against Lightning
IEC61312 – Protection Against Lighting Electromagnetic Impulse
IEC61662 – Assessment of the Risk of Damage Due to Lightning
IEC61663 – Lightning Protection – telecommunications lines, fibre

optic installations
F. In a situation where a conflict occurs between codes or standards, the

A. The switchboard will be suitable for operation in a non-air-conditioned

humid environment.
1.4. WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to

develop the design, supply, install, test, commission and verify the
lightning protection systems as indicated on the drawings and specified
in these specifications, to provide a complete and operational
installation in accordance with local authority requirements.
B. The lightning protection system shall comprise air terminations via use of
the rooftop metal structure, down conductors embedded within the
structural reinforcement bars, bonding of the façade structures and the
earth mats and electrodes. All connection details shall be in
accordance with the drawings and associated details.
1.5. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the substructure and structure

packages to utilize the building structure to provide the down
conductors through the building. The Contractor will take responsibility
for the electrodes and substructure connections and extend the system
as shown on the drawings. If the structure earthing system fails at any
point due to miss-management, the Contractor shall revert to external
tape down conductors and/or electrodes within pits.
B. Allow for complete coordination with all trades and services to ensure
C. If necessary, coordinate with the local supply authority for the provision
and installation of earthing electrode and inspection pits in accordance
with their requirements for sub -stations, LV switch rooms, lightning
protection and general electrical services installations.
D. Coordinate the installation of roof tapes, air terminations, down

conductors, earth electrodes and all miscellaneous components with
the Contractor.
E. Locate earth pits within landscaping within the plot boundary or in areas

which are not on main circulation routes. Ensure adequate access for
inspection, maintenance and repair is available at all times.
F. Coordinate down conductors and earth electrodes within concrete

columns and piles with the Contractor.
1. The Contractor shall ensure that, at the completion of the installation,

the resistance to earth from each testing point does not exceed 10
Ohms
1.6. RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Appoint a specialist lightning protection vendor to develop and

undertake the detailed design, installation, testing and commissioning
of the lightning protection system. This shall include:
1. Provision of early streamer emission lightning arrester (ESE).
2. Provision of air terminations. (NOT APPLICABLE)
3. Vertical and horizontal tape conductors. (NOT APPLICABLE)
4. Provision of ring conductors linking the earth electrodes.
5. Linking the conductor system to the structural steelwork and reinforcing

bars. The distance between perimeters down conductors/electrodes
will be 10m.
6. Testing the whole system including connections to the building

cladding.
7. Provision of test points and reference electrodes at lowest basement

level.
8. Miscellaneous bonds to structural steelwork, lift guide rails, BMU track,

grilles, glazing mullions and any other exposed metallic conductive
parts.
9. Linking the substation earth bar network to the lightning protection

system (if accepted by the Local Electricity Authority).
10. Provision of surge protection devices connected to the BMS which

report/record the time and date of potential lightning strikes to

the building.
B. The Contractor shall provide continuous steelwork and reinforcement

bars within structural columns that are to be used for down conductors
and earth electrodes.
C. Test the pile steelwork/reinforcement to ensure it is electrically

continuous.
D. The Contractor shall provide pile cap / raft slab connection points for
bonding the lightning protection system.
E. The Contractor shall provide connection points onto the building

external cladding for connection to the lightning protection system.
1.7. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Provide complete detailed design shop drawings as produced in

conjunction with the appointed specialist sub-contractor. These shall be
coordinated with the Contractors specialist for structural re-bar and
piling cage steelwork.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL
A. Include for the supply and installation of all necessary components to

provide a complete lightning protection system for the building(s) as
detailed in the following Specification Sections in order that the
building(s) may be protected against the effects of a lightning
discharge in accordance with IEC 62305.
B. The installation shall comprise air networks connected to roof and down
conductors and final termination to earth electrodes, via structural re-
bars and suitable test points in accordance with the details included on
the attached drawings or in the following Specification Section. Copper
conductors will be used throughout.
C. Each component shall be suitable for the application and as specifically

detailed in the following Specification Sections and/or drawings.
D. Conductor tape saddles shall be fixed to the walls by roundhead

37.5mm x No. 8 brass wood screws and raw plugs, the saddles being
spaced at not less than 1.00m intervals. As an alternative the specialist
may use resin epoxy fittings with a design life of not less than 25 years in
the UAE Environment. (NOT APPLICABLE)
E. Bi-metal connections shall be provided between aluminium and copper

interfaces and elsewhere as necessary to avoid electrolytic action.
2.2. ROOF CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Air terminations shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
B. Provide a network of conductor tape around the roof area of the

building. This shall be used to connect all down conductors, window
cleaning track, cladding, structural reinforcing and all other exposed
conductive metal parts to a common potential.
C. The roof conductors shall be fixed to the roof surface by saddles

positioned at intervals not exceeding 1.00m by suitable means, care
shall be taken to ensure that any holes formed in the cladding, are
effectively sealed to prevent ingress of water.
2.3. RING CONDUCTORS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Ring conductor on the building facade shall be provided as required by

IEC / EN 62305.
B. Provide a network of ring conductor tape around the facade of the

building, connecting to all down conductor.
C. The ring conductors shall be fixed to/under the facade surface by

saddles positioned at intervals not exceeding 1.00m by suitable means.
The ring conductor installation should be fully coordinated with the
Architect.
2.4. DOWN CONDUCTORS
A. Provide down conductor tapes at spacings as recommended in IEC

62305 (at spacings of approximately 10m apart) or to suit the structural
column spacing grid. (NOT APPLICABLE)
B. Down conductors shall be provided as part of the reinforcing bars within

the concrete structure and connected to a common loop tape

at roof level and ring conductor at levels shown on the drawings.
C. Down conductor tapes shall terminate on to dedicated reinforcing bars

which shall be utilized as the final connection to earth via the pile
foundations. Include for supervising and testing the installation of the
reinforcing bars including all joints prior to the concrete being poured.
(NOT APPLICABLE)
D. Provide connection points from column down conductors at

approximate heights of 20m intervals for connection to the external
building cladding. (NOT APPLICABLE)
2.5. AIR FINIALS
A. Provide air finials and air terminations on the roof of the building as
required by EN IEC 62305.
B. Connect air terminations to the nearest down conductor within

structural columns via cad welded copper conductors.
2.6. TEST POINTS
A. Ensure that a joint for test purposes at approximately 1m from finished

floor level, on every down conductor. The test link shall be of cast gun-
metal and be proprietary manufactured to enable the electrode to be
removed from the lightning protection system.
2.7. EARTH REFERENCE PITS
A. Certain individual down conductors shall be effectively bonded to

suitable 3.60m long by 16mm diameter earth rods manufactured from
hard drawn copper rod in the form of 1.20m sections. Each section shall
be complete with internal screws and socket. The earth reference
electrode shall be installed not more than 1.00m away from the building
with the earth reference electrode head located not less than 200mm
below the ground level. Final connection of the down conductor to the
earth reference electrode shall be made by means of a pressure type
connector clamp.
B. Include for the supply and delivery of inspection pits manufactured as

detailed in the attached Specification Section and/or drawings, these

to be handed over to the Contractor for installation. An inspection pit
shall be supplied for each earth termination. Heavy duty covers suitable
to withstand vehicular traffic shall be provided for pits located in the
roadway and car park areas. The lid of each pit shall be lockable and
jam free construction and supplied with the appropriate key.
C. Where electrode points are located internally within building floor slabs,
they shall comprise a suitable earth rod water seal installed in the base
of a pocket formed in the slab, with the pocket and associated cover.
D. The body of each earth pit shall as a minimum comprise shatterproof,

lightweight, polymer material with a high resistance to chemical
damage from such substances as petrol, oil, diesel, bitumen etc. Each
unit shall include high ultra-violet stability, wide temperature application
and earth bar facility (where necessary) to permit multiple earth tape
connections to be made. Where these are not suitable concrete pits
shall be provided.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. All defects and restrictions associated with the existing installation shall
be reported to the Engineer before connecting the installations.
B. Copper tape shall be secured to the building structure by means of

proprietary fixings that clamp the tape – the fixing shall not penetrate
the tape. The tape shall be spaced from the building fabric with a
minimum clearance as previously detailed.
C. Distance between fixings for vertically routed tape shall be 500mm and
1000mm for horizontally routed tape.
D. Joints in circular conductors shall be made using proprietary clamp type

couplings installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and soldered, brazed or welded as described below.
E. Joints in flat tape type conductors shall be made by tinning the joint
faces with solder and securing the conductors to each other by a

minimum of two copper rivets or two brass bolts. The joints shall then be
sweat soldered, or brazed at 600 C with zinc-free brazing or cold
pressure welded.
F. The joint faces shall be made to overlap.
G. Stranded conductors shall be PVC sheathed and the joints made by

compression type joints.
H. Connections to and from the conductors shall be made by stranded

conductors by use of a crimped lug type connection applied by an
automatic compression tool in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
I. The lug connection shall be secured to the conductor and equipment

by the means of phosphor bronze bolts, nuts and washers.
J. Provide and fix system labels as required by EN IEC 62305 and as

described in elsewhere this document.
K. All metallic projections, ducts, vent pipes, gutters, television aerials, fan
housings, etc., on or above the main surface of the roof structure
shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination network.
L. Where it is found that the resistance to earth at any test point is in excess
of 10 Ohms, the length and number of earth electrodes shall be
increased to the instructions of the Engineer, in order to comply with the
requirements of the British Standard. The resistance of each metallic
conducting path, including all joints, shall not exceed 6% of the
calculated resistance of the copper tape itself. In addition, the
resistance from the earth electrode to the nearest test clamp shall not
exceed 0.2 Ohms.
M. The Contractor shall include ensuring that, at the completion of the

installation, the resistance to earth from each testing point does not
exceed 10 Ohms, the tests being carried out in accordance with IEC
61936. The Contractor shall include for the performance of these tests a
d submitting the results to the Engineer.
N. Upon completion of the works, submit a certificate of installation to the

Engineer for review and approval.

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.3. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................1
1.4. SAMPLES & SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................1
1.5. COORDINATE WITH FINISHES SCHEDULE .................................................................2
1.6. LIGHTING LEVELS .......................................................................................................2
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................2
2.1. FLUORESCENT FITTINGS .............................................................................................2
2.2. LAMPS & TUBES ..........................................................................................................2
2.3. CONTROL GEAR ........................................................................................................3
2.4. HID BALLASTS .............................................................................................................4
2.5. LAMP HOLDERS .........................................................................................................4
2.6. SPARE LAMPS.............................................................................................................5
2.7. REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES .............................................................................5
2.8. REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFICE AREA LUMINAIRES (NOT APPLICABLE) .....................7
2.10. LIGHTING WITHIN APARTMENTS (NOT APPLICABLE) ...............................................8
2.11. LIGHTING WITHIN PUBLIC AREAS (NOT APPLICABLE) .............................................8
2.12. LIGHTING WITHIN LANDSCAPE AREAS AND BUILDING FACADES .........................8
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................8
3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................8
3.2. REFLECTORS, LENSES & CLEANING ........................................................................10
3.3. AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................10
Interior Lighting Section 26 51 00 - 0

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading: Lighting Luminaires
B. Refer also to specification section 260650 – Schedules for lighting.

authority.

1.3. COORDINATION
A. Liaise with the Contractor to arrange for correct size openings in ceilings
(particularly plasterboard), determining suitability of edge details of
luminaires and correct location of luminaires.
B. Supply plaster rings for recessed luminaires and install in conjunction with
ceiling tile or plaster ceiling section in their correct location.
C. Ensure no light spill around the abutting edge detail occurs unless the
luminaire/lighting design is intentional.
D. Coordinate with the lighting control manufacturer to confirm all circuit

power allowances and control requirements.
E. Coordinate with the emergency lighting manufacturer to incorporate

any required devices integral to the luminaire body.
1.4. SAMPLES & SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit samples of all fixtures used on the project to the Engineer for
approval. No additional fixtures shall be manufactured until the sample

has been approved.
B. Each approved sample shall be retained on the job site until the final
completion of the project. Fixtures which do not match quality and
workmanship standards of the sample shall be rejected at no additional
cost to the Contract.
C. For one-off specials, provide manufacturers concept drawings and

samples of materials to be used in the fabrication of the fixture.
D. With each working drawing, submit a schedule identifying each room

with power density (W/m 2). The schedule should also identify the ASHAE
90.1 maximum allowance and % reduction.
1.5. COORDINATE WITH FINISHES SCHEDULE
A. Prior to placing orders for luminaires check the luminaire finishes details,
compare these against the room finishes schedule to ensure that
luminaires are coordinated with the finishes schedule.
1.6. LIGHTING LEVELS
A. Lighting levels for various area of the project shall be designed and
installed to achieve the maintained average luminance levels stated
within the luminaire schedule.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. FLUORESCENT FITTINGS
A. Fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied as indicated on the attached

schedule to comply with this section.
B. Integral fuses shall typically be rated at 2A
C. Luminaires shall be suitable for single or continuous mounting.
2.2. LAMPS & TUBES
A. Lamps shall be provided and fitted for all luminaires supplied under this
Contract. All lamps of a given type shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer.
B. Fluorescent tubes shall be provided in accordance with the attached

schedule and/or specification sections and drawings. Unless otherwise

specified fluorescent lamps shall be coloured white (4000K) for general
project use.
C. Lamps in public areas or guest areas shall be 3000K unless otherwise

specified.
D. Unless identified otherwise all fluorescent luminaires shall be provided

complete with triphosphor lamps.
E. All lamps shall be in accordance with IEC 60064 and IEC 60081 (tubular
fluorescent), also EN 60188 (high pressure MV) and EN 60192 (low
pressure sodium vapor lamp) as detailed in the Schedule of Luminaires
and Lamps and/or Specification Sections and drawings.
F. HID lamps shall be of the wattage rating indicated. Unless otherwise

indicated, they shall be of the colour corrected type.
2.3. CONTROL GEAR
A. The control gear associated with each of the fluorescent luminaires shall
accord with IEC 60082 and IEC 60566 and be of the dimmable
electronic high frequency (dimmable where noted) type unless
otherwise stated, suitable for T8 26mm diameter or T5 16mm diameter
fluorescent lamps. (Luminaires in plantrooms and service areas may use
low loss control gear).
B. Control gear shall be either of electronic or ultra-low loss to achieve

maximum total circuit watts of typically 36W lamp 1200mm - 41 watts,
58w lamp 1500mm - 64 watts, 70w lamp 1800mm - 76 watts.
C. The control gear shall be fixed to the back-spine with a minimum air
space of 3mm, individual components being removable without the
necessity to dismount the luminaire. Self-tapping screws shall not project
through the back-spine. The control gear shall be suitable for either
ceiling mounted or suspended luminaires.
D. The noise level emitted shall not exceed 36 dB Scale A (Noise Rating
Number 30) when obtained from the average of sound pressure levels
each measured at 1m from the control gear in at least five positions on

each side and below the luminaire. When measured in accordance

with EN 23 741, readings more than 10dB below the maximum to be
disregarded.
2.4. HID BALLASTS
A. HID ballasts shall be supplied with rated voltage matching the supply
voltage. Ballasts shall be of the constant wattage, regulated output
type to maintain correct lamp operation over a voltage input rating of
10%.
B. Outdoor ballasts shall be capable of starting the lamps for which they
are rated under all external ambient conditions.
2.5. LAMP HOLDERS
A. Each luminaire shall be complete with a suitable lamp holder, or lamp

holders, to IEC 60061, IEC 60384, IEC 60061, IEC 60238, as appropriate,
with the tungsten luminaires being complete with heavy duty H.O.
pattern lamp holders of the G.E.S, E.S., or B.C. type as detailed below.
B. Lamp holders for use with fluorescent lamps shall be either of the white
Bakelite retractable bi -pin type of center twist type, complete with
metal earthing clamp, in accordance with IEC 60061-1 and IEC 60061-
3.
C. The lamp holders for GLS lamps shall be provided as follows: -
1. ELV Lamps - SBC type
2. Lamps up to and including 100 watts - B.C. type.
3. Lamps over 100 watts and including 300 watts - E.S. type.
4. Lamps over 300 watts - G.E.S. type.
5. All E.S. and G.E.S. lamp holders shall be of the porcelain type with brass
guard. lamp holders shall be of the heavy-duty brass type.
6. Where S.B.C. or non-standard lamp holders are specified in other

sections of this Specification they shall be of the heavy-duty brass type.
7. Lamp holders suspended from flexible cords shall be of the all-insulated

cord-grip type, with insulated skirts and solid stem plungers complete
with external springs. The cable entry to the lamp holders shall allow the
cable sheath to be taken into the lamp holder.
8. Lamp holders incorporating telescopic type plungers shall be used in

conjunction with non-flexible cables only.
2.6. SPARE LAMPS
A. Provide spare lamps for each type used on the project as follows: -
1. LED - 20%
2. Fluorescent (linear and compact) & HID - 20%
B. At the completion and prior to handover of the project, the contractor

will replace all lamps within the building.
2.7. REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A. All luminaires shall be of the manufacture, size and type specified in

particular specification and shall comply in all respects to EN 60598
Electric Luminaires, CIE 24/CIE 27, EN 10598-1, EN 10598-2 & EN 60598-2-
22.
B. All luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with the

appropriate sections of IEC 60598-2-1. C. All luminaires shall incorporate
simple means of dismantling diffusers for cleaning.
C. Metalwork on all luminaires (other than specular surfaces) shall be

phosphate treated and finished with acrylic paint to the colour
identified in the schedules.
D. All internal wiring shall be carried out in 16/0.2mm high temperature

PVC.
E. All fluorescent and other discharge luminaires shall be provided with an

integral fused connector block fitted by the luminaire manufacturer. The
rating of the fuse shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction to protect the internal wiring of the luminaire and to provide
discrimination between final circuit protection and luminaire circuit
protection.

F. In discharge and other fluorescent luminaires, fuses shall be readily

accessible.
G. All fluorescent and discharge luminaires shall be fitted with suitably rated
capacitors that comply with EN 61048, EN 61049, EN 10598-1, EN 10598-
2, EN 60598-2-22 & EN 1010 and ensure that power factor at the luminaire
power supply terminals is within the range 0.85 - 0.95 lagging. Where
discharge luminaires are fitted with starter switches then capacitors for
radio interference suppression shall be fitted ensuring the radio
interference from the luminaires is within the limits of EN 55015 & EN
10598-2. The starter switches shall be readily accessible.
H. Fluorescent and other forms of discharge luminaire shall be complete

with an integral HRC circuit fuse and a capacitor of the dry foil type, to
provide power factor correction to a minimum of 0.9 lagging.
I. Where the diffusers for luminaires are of a thermoplastic material the

Contractor shall include for supplying the appropriate diffusers. The
diffuser panels shall be fire retardant to Class 1 IEC 61508: Part 7.
J. All thermoplastic diffusers for recessed luminaires shall be of the TP(a)

type as defined in the UK Building Regulations.
K. Glass used for lenses, reflectors and diffusers in luminaires shall be

tempered for high impact and heat resistance.
L. All parabolic cones and plastic for lenses and diffusers shall be
guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of ten years, and in the
event of premature discoloration, brittlement, or loss of light
transmittance they shall be replaced by the manufacturer, including
both materials and the cost of labor.
M. Luminaires designed for use with 300-watt lamps and larger sizes shall
incorporate cool wiring devices so that in the ambient temperature of
21 deg. C they shall limit the temperature of the fitting wiring to a
maximum of 50 deg. C and the temperature of the lamp caps to a
maximum of 150 deg. C.
N. All LED luminaires will be selected with LM79 and LM80 compliance. They

will contain a 5-year full replacement warranty as a minimum.
O. Selection of efficient luminaries with integral power factor of 0.95 and a

high LOR (Light Output Ratio) above 0.75.
2.8. REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFICE AREA LUMINAIRES (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Luminaires and lighting design layouts for the general illumination of

office areas shall comply with the requirements of the following
documents:
1. CIBSE Guide LG3 - The Visual Environment for Display Screen Use, 1996
(including all latest addenda)
2. SLL Lighting Guide 7: Office Lighting
B. The luminaire photometric distribution curve shall indicate a well-

rounded distribution of light with a downward intensity within 90% of the
peak value and a run back above the peak value that is well-rounded.
The Contractor shall provide polar distribution curves for the proposed
luminaire for review by the Engineer.
C. Control gear shall be 0-10-volt high frequency dimmable type and shall
be proved compatible with the lighting control system, where provided,
prior to order of the luminaires. The luminaire supplier shall include for
and provide an extended warranty period of 1 year from the date of
supply for the control gear associated with the office luminaires.
A. Final connections to all luminaires shall be made by means of an

approved nylon connector terminal block, complete with two screws,
brass ferrules for connecting to the final sub -circuit wiring. Push fit/clamp
type termination for final circuit wiring is not acceptable.
B. Each luminaire shall be packaged with complete instructions and

illustrations showing how to install it and shall be installed in strict
conformance with manufacturers recommendations and instructions.
C. Luminaires shall not be delivered to building or stored therein until dry

and protected space is available for proper storage of luminaires.

D. Luminaires shall be completely assembled in factory and shall be

delivered to building in cartons or in palletized form, as directed.
E. Luminaires to be supplied complete with proprietary plug and socket

arrangement to allow quick installation/interface with lighting control
wherever feasible.
F. Lay-in type diffusers shall be retained by concealed devices to prevent

the panel or louvre from lifting when doors etc. are opened or closed.
G. Where luminaires are designated as emergency, they are to be factory

fitted with the necessary control gear, interface units and hold-off relays
as recommended by the specialist supplier.
H. Luminaires converted for use as emergency type are to be complete

with red/green LED indicator lamp to indicate healthy battery
availability status.
2.10. LIGHTING WITHIN APARTMENTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Please refer to luminaire layouts and luminaire specifications/schedules.
2.11. LIGHTING WITHIN PUBLIC AREAS (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Please refer to luminaire layouts and luminaire specifications/schedules.
2.12. LIGHTING WITHIN LANDSCAPE AREAS AND BUILDING FACADES
A. Please refer to lighting layouts and luminaire specifications/schedules

completed by the Specialist lighting designer -Light Bureau.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Luminaires which do not incorporate insulated shrouding material to the

lamp holder shall be earthed. Under no circumstances shall the
suspension chain, wire or non-rigid tube be used as the earth continuity
conductor. Flexible earth wires shall be provided across all ball/socket
joints.
B. Where luminaires are installed in a flush installation the appropriate

number of conduit boxes shall be installed. Final circuit connection at

discharge luminaires shall be left long enough to terminate at the

connections within the luminaire such that cables do not pass over
starting/control equipment. Where this cannot be achieved heat,
resistant sleeving shall be installed over the cables.
C. Where recessed luminaires are used in conjunction with a suspended

ceiling, the luminaires shall be suitable for being supported from the
ceiling grid system via adjustable mounting brackets. For Tender
purposes however, the Contract shall include for the cost of
independent conduit tube suspensions.
D. The ceiling details shall be checked for suitability of taking the support
of the luminaires prior to ordering the luminaires or commencing the
lighting installation and, if suitable, an instruction shall be issued
accordingly. Under no circumstances shall any independent conduit
suspension for luminaires be used to support the ceiling system.
E. Continuous rows of luminaires shall be rigidly aligned for true in-line

appearance.
F. Luminaires suspended by means of conduit drops shall be fitted to ball

joints allowing a swing of at least 20° all round. Reliable earthing
between the fixed and moving parts shall be provided by means of a
flexible braided copper tape. The ball joints shall have a stop to prevent
rotation by more than 360°. Any deviation from this form of suspension
must be agreed with the Engineer.
G. Where conduit suspension is used final circuit wiring shall be contained

within the conduit and terminated directly within the luminaire.
H. Luminaires incorporating tube suspensions shall be complete with non-

rigid connections to the general conduit system, the conduits being of
the hook plate type. Ball socket joints shall be provided if the suspension
tubes exceed 600mm in length or are suspended from sloping surfaces.
I. Luminaire heights and locations in mechanical and electrical

plantrooms shall be coordinated to clear plant and equipment and to
adequately illuminate meters, gauges, panels, and equipment.

J. Luminaires which do not incorporate insulated shrouding material to the

joints.
K. Unless otherwise stated, each luminaire in this specification shall be

mechanically connected to a metal conduit box by means of suitable
brass R.H. screws finished to match the metalwork of the luminaire. The
terminal block shall be enclosed in the conduit box.
L. All batten lamp holders not fitted with shades shall be complete with
insulated skirt. Shade carrier rings shall be provided with all lamp holders
not incorporated in fittings.
M. After testing the installation, lamps and tubes shall be removed from the
luminaires and replaced prior to handover to ensure that all lamps are
new at handover.
3.2. REFLECTORS, LENSES & CLEANING
A. All glassware, diffusers, reflectors, etc., shall be left in a clean condition.

Allowance shall be made for all plastic surfaces which reflect or transmit
light or are visible to view to be treated with an anti-static solution to
prevent static electricity.
B. Reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of all luminaires shall not be
installed (or otherwise protected in an approved manner) until
completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting and general clean-
up. They shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or finger printing
and shall be completely clean at the time of handover by methods as
recommended by the manufacturers.
C. All broken parts shall have been replaced and all lamps shall be
operative.
D. Allow, to ensure that at handover all luminaires and lamps provided are
in pristine condition.
3.3. AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. All adjustable luminaires shall be aimed, focused, locked etc., by the

Contractor to the requirements of the Engineer. This shall be carried out
once the installation is complete. All necessary ladders, scaffolds etc.
shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. Where possible units shall be focused during the normal working day.
However, where daylight interferes with viewing or proper adjustments,
aiming shall be accomplished at night.

SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 | GENERAL ............................................................................................................1

1.3. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................1
1.4. SAMPLES & SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................1
1.5. COORDINATE WITH FINISHES SCHEDULE .................................................................2
PART 2 | PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................2
2.1. COLUMNS & BOLLARDS ...........................................................................................2
2.2. LAMPS ........................................................................................................................2
2.3. CONTROL GEAR ........................................................................................................2
2.4. REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES .............................................................................3
2.5. BUILDING FEATURE / FAÇADE LIGHTING .................................................................3
PART 3 | EXECUTION ........................................................................................................3
3.1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................3
3.2. INSTALLATION (COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS) ...........................................................4
3.3. REFLECTORS, LENSES & CLEANING ..........................................................................5
3.4. AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................5
Lightning Protection for Structures Section 26 56 00 -0

SECTION 26 56 00 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 | GENERAL

heading:
Exterior Lighting
Luminaires
B. Refer also to specification section 260650 – Schedules for lighting.

current issue of the IEC 60364 and the requirements of the local
supply authority.

1.3. COORDINATION
A. Liaise with the Landscape Contractor to arrange for correct positioning,

setting-out, conduit, cable routes, feeder pillar locations etc.
B. Coordinate with the lighting control manufacturer to confirm all circuit

power allowances and control requirements.
1.4. SAMPLES & SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit samples of all fixtures used on the project to the Engineer for
approval. No additional fixtures shall be manufactured until the sample
has been approved.
Each approved sample shall be retained on the job site until the final
completion of the project.
B. Fixtures which do not match quality and workmanship standards of the

sample shall be rejected at no additional cost to the Contract.

C. For one-off specials, provide manufacturers concept drawings and

samples of materials to be used in the fabrication of the fixture.
1.5. COORDINATE WITH FINISHES SCHEDULE
A. Prior to placing orders for luminaires check the luminaire finishes details,
compare these against the room finishes schedule to ensure that
luminaires are coordinated with the finishes schedule.
PART 2 | PRODUCTS
2.1. COLUMNS & BOLLARDS
A. Fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied as indicated on the attached

schedule to comply with this section.
B. Integral fuses shall typically be rated at 2A
C. Luminaires shall be suitable for single or continuous mounting.
D. Luminaries in kitchen and laundry areas shall be to IP65 rating.
2.2. LAMPS
A. Lamps shall be provided and fitted for all luminaires supplied under this
Contract. All lamps of a given type shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer.
B. Fluorescent tubes shall be provided in accordance with the attached

schedule and/or specification sections and drawings. Unless otherwise
specified, discharge lamps shall be coloured white (4000K) for external
use.
C. All lamps shall be in accordance with BS.3677 (high pressure MV) and
BS.3767 (low pressure sodium vapour lamp).
D. HID lamps shall be of the wattage rating indicated. Unless otherwise

indicated, they shall be of the colour corrected type.
2.3. CONTROL GEAR
A. HID ballasts and control gear shall be supplied with rated voltage
matching the supply voltage. Ballasts shall be of the constant wattage,
regulated output type to maintain correct lamp operation over a

voltage input rating of 10%.
B. Outdoor ballasts shall be capable of starting the lamps for which they
are rated under all external ambient conditions.
2.4. REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A. Glass used for lenses, reflectors and diffusers in luminaires shall be

tempered for high impact and heat resistance.
2.5. BUILDING FEATURE / FAÇADE LIGHTING
A. Provide external feature and façade lighting to the building. This shall
comprise building wall wash luminaires, floodlights and spotlights to
highlight architectural features, LED edge lighting for building roof detail,
landscape lighting, road lighting, and illuminated branding signage.
B. Generally, the external lighting shall be controlled by the Lighting

Control Panel
C. Locate control modules within electrical distribution cupboards and

closets.
PART 3 | EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Luminaires which do not incorporate insulated shrouding material to the

joints.
B. Where luminaires are installed in a flush installation the appropriate

number of conduit boxes shall be installed. Final circuit connection at
discharge luminaires shall be left long enough to terminate at the
connections within the luminaire such that cables do not pass over
starting/control equipment. Where this cannot be achieved heat,
resistant sleeving shall be installed over the cables.
C. Continuous rows of luminaires shall be rigidly aligned for true in-line

appearance.

D. Where conduit suspension is used final circuit wiring shall be contained

within the conduit and terminated directly within the luminaire.
E. Luminaires incorporating tube suspensions shall be complete with non-

rigid connections to the general conduit system, the conduits being of
the hook plate type. Ball socket joints shall be provided if the suspension
tubes exceed 600mm in length or are suspended from sloping surfaces.
F. Luminaires which do not incorporate insulated shrouding material to the

joints.
G. After testing the installation, lamps and tubes shall be removed from the
luminaires and replaced prior to handover to ensure that all lamps are
new at handover.
3.2. INSTALLATION (COLUMNS AND BOLLARDS)
A. All excavations, provisions of earthenware conduits together with the

backfilling of trenches, after the cable tiles have been laid, shall be
carried out by the Contractor. Include for the necessary liaison with the
Contractor in the instruction for this work. Before excavations are
backfilled the Engineer shall be notified in writing that the c able
installation is complete, in order that an inspection may be made of the
cable installation.
B. Lighting standards 3-5m high generally shall be set at a minimum depth

of 750mm in the ground set on a hardcore or concrete plinth
approximately 450mm square by 150mm deep with 300mm deep
concrete poured in situ around the base of the column.
C. Note that where columns in excess of 12m high are to be installed

(including high mast fittings) the detail of the concrete mounting plinth
required shall be confirmed by the Engineer before the installation
proceeds.
D. The complete foundation shall be secured by well compressed earth

before the Contractor provides the hardcore for the paving.
E. The standards and bollards shall be erected vertically and in alignment

under the Contract. Each fitting shall be positioned such that it is not less
than 300mm away from the inside edge of the curb to the roadway.
F. All cables serving the luminaires shall loop in and out of the fittings and
joint boxes. No other tee joints shall be permitted. The position of column
cut-out access doors shall be agreed in advance with the Engineer.
G. An efficient earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of

the luminaires and the wire armouring of the cables.
H. A typed label shall be provided and fixed on the inside face of the door
of each standard, to indicate the reference number of the fittings,
together with details of where the cables are connected to the main
supply point.
I. All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise
detailed shall be of PVC / SWA and PVC sheathed type supplied and
installed in accordance with the relevant clauses of the particular
specification section. Connection between the luminaire lamp circuit
and the HRC fused cut-out shall be by means of an insulated flexible
cord in accordance with the appropriate specification section.
J. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

requirements.
3.3. REFLECTORS, LENSES & CLEANING
A. All diffusers, reflectors, etc., shall be left in a clean condition.
B. Allow, to ensure that at handover all luminaires and lamps provided are
in pristine condition.
3.4. AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. All adjustable luminaires shall be aimed, focused, locked etc., by the

Contractor to the requirements of the Engineer. This shall be carried out
once the installation is complete. All necessary ladders, scaffolds,
access towers etc. shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. External feature and façade lighting shall be focused at night.

Electrical Services Specification for Villa (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Services Specification for Villa (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIVISION 26

SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL SERVICES SEPCIFICATIONS

MB1908 – VILLA (G+1+R+SB+GARAGE)

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 0

3.22. EARTHING ................................................................................................................26

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 1

SECTION 26 02 00 – GENRRAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTES

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section of the specification includes the following sub-section

1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with the

B. The entire installation shall be installed and tested in accordance with

1.3. SPECIFICATION SCOPE

A. This section supplements the main contract documents “General

B. This specification covers the design of details, supply, installation and

C. Where, for special reasons, requirements differ from those included in

D. The words as indicated, where indicated, unless otherwise indicated,

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 2

refer to requirements identified elsewhere in the documents issued in

E. The extent of the work shall comprise the whole management,

1.4. COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

A. The whole of the work and materials to be supplied shall be in

B. Local Municipality, Green Book Regulations and Electrical Authority

C. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and European Norms

D. Requirements of the local Civil Defense.

E. Requirements and all Regulations of power supply authority including all

G. Requirements of the Relevant Safety & Construction Regulations.

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 3

H. Air Traffic Control & Civil Aviation Authority (where applicable)

I. Requirements of the telecom local supply authority for communications

1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Where possible, supply equipment only from manufacturers who have a

2.1. TENDER DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS

A. The whole of the services at present envisaged are indicated in the

B. This Specification has been prepared to define the quality of material

C. Drawings issued as part of the Contract Documents are in general

D. Notwithstanding any dimensions which may be given on the drawings,

2.2. PRECEDENCE BETWEEN DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATION AND OTHER

A. This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Tender Drawings.

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 4

B. If any variations occur to any regulations, statutory instruments or

2.3. INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (SHOP DRAWINGS)

A. Prior to manufacture and installation, prepare installation drawings for

C. Paper prints of each installation drawing shall be issued to the Engineer

D. When drawings have been returned with no comment the Contractor

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 5

E. Installation drawings shall be reviewed by the Engineer and returned to

F. No equipment shall be delivered to the job site unless the manufacturer

G. If the drawing is returned with comments, the Contractor shall amend

I. Responsibility for errors in the installation drawings irrespective of whether

J. The Contract drawings shall not be considered as the installation

K. Installation drawings shall be to an approved scale and shall also form

L. The Contractor shall consult the current Architectural, Structural, Interior

all other working drawings during the preparation of the installation

P. The Contractor’s drawings shall be titled in an approved manner with

R. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any discrepancies,

S. Information contained in any of the drawings supplied by the Engineer

2.4. WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (BY THE CONTRACTOR)

A. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be prepared for all plant requiring

General Technical Requirements Section 26 02 00 - 7

optional features, other machines of a range, etc., shall be deleted. All

1. Maximum electrical loading for each power cable.